WO2014196527A1 - 液晶表示装置 - Google Patents
液晶表示装置 Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2014196527A1 WO2014196527A1 PCT/JP2014/064731 JP2014064731W WO2014196527A1 WO 2014196527 A1 WO2014196527 A1 WO 2014196527A1 JP 2014064731 W JP2014064731 W JP 2014064731W WO 2014196527 A1 WO2014196527 A1 WO 2014196527A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- group
- liquid crystal
- carbon atoms
- display device
- crystal display
- Prior art date
Links
- 0 C*CC(*C)c1ccccc1 Chemical compound C*CC(*C)c1ccccc1 0.000 description 6
- LCRDYQLDFQLXMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC1C2OCC(C)C2OC1 Chemical compound CC1C2OCC(C)C2OC1 LCRDYQLDFQLXMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/52—Liquid crystal materials characterised by components which are not liquid crystals, e.g. additives with special physical aspect: solvents, solid particles
- C09K19/58—Dopants or charge transfer agents
- C09K19/586—Optically active dopants; chiral dopants
- C09K19/588—Heterocyclic compounds
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/04—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
- C09K19/06—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds
- C09K19/08—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings
- C09K19/10—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing at least two benzene rings
- C09K19/20—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing at least two benzene rings linked by a chain containing carbon and oxygen atoms as chain links, e.g. esters or ethers
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/04—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
- C09K19/06—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds
- C09K19/08—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings
- C09K19/10—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing at least two benzene rings
- C09K19/20—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing at least two benzene rings linked by a chain containing carbon and oxygen atoms as chain links, e.g. esters or ethers
- C09K19/2007—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing at least two benzene rings linked by a chain containing carbon and oxygen atoms as chain links, e.g. esters or ethers the chain containing -COO- or -OCO- groups
- C09K19/2021—Compounds containing at least one asymmetric carbon atom
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/04—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
- C09K19/06—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds
- C09K19/08—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings
- C09K19/10—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing at least two benzene rings
- C09K19/20—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing at least two benzene rings linked by a chain containing carbon and oxygen atoms as chain links, e.g. esters or ethers
- C09K19/2007—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing at least two benzene rings linked by a chain containing carbon and oxygen atoms as chain links, e.g. esters or ethers the chain containing -COO- or -OCO- groups
- C09K19/2021—Compounds containing at least one asymmetric carbon atom
- C09K19/2028—Compounds containing at least one asymmetric carbon atom containing additionally a linking group other than -COO- or -OCO-, e.g. -CH2-CH2-, -CH=CH-, -C=C-; containing at least one additional carbon atom in the chain containing -COO- or -OCO- groups, e.g. -COO-CH*-CH3
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/04—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
- C09K19/06—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds
- C09K19/08—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings
- C09K19/30—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing saturated or unsaturated non-aromatic rings, e.g. cyclohexane rings
- C09K19/3001—Cyclohexane rings
- C09K19/3028—Cyclohexane rings in which at least two rings are linked by a carbon chain containing carbon to carbon single bonds
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/04—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
- C09K19/06—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds
- C09K19/08—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings
- C09K19/30—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing saturated or unsaturated non-aromatic rings, e.g. cyclohexane rings
- C09K19/3001—Cyclohexane rings
- C09K19/3066—Cyclohexane rings in which the rings are linked by a chain containing carbon and oxygen atoms, e.g. esters or ethers
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/04—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
- C09K19/06—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds
- C09K19/08—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings
- C09K19/30—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing saturated or unsaturated non-aromatic rings, e.g. cyclohexane rings
- C09K19/3001—Cyclohexane rings
- C09K19/3066—Cyclohexane rings in which the rings are linked by a chain containing carbon and oxygen atoms, e.g. esters or ethers
- C09K19/3068—Cyclohexane rings in which the rings are linked by a chain containing carbon and oxygen atoms, e.g. esters or ethers chain containing -COO- or -OCO- groups
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/04—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
- C09K19/06—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds
- C09K19/34—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least one heterocyclic ring
- C09K19/3402—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least one heterocyclic ring having oxygen as hetero atom
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/04—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
- C09K19/06—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds
- C09K19/34—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least one heterocyclic ring
- C09K19/3441—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least one heterocyclic ring having nitrogen as hetero atom
- C09K19/345—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least one heterocyclic ring having nitrogen as hetero atom the heterocyclic ring being a six-membered aromatic ring containing two nitrogen atoms
- C09K19/3458—Uncondensed pyrimidines
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/04—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
- C09K19/06—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds
- C09K19/34—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least one heterocyclic ring
- C09K19/3441—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least one heterocyclic ring having nitrogen as hetero atom
- C09K19/3477—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least one heterocyclic ring having nitrogen as hetero atom the heterocyclic ring being a five-membered aromatic ring containing at least one nitrogen atom
- C09K19/348—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least one heterocyclic ring having nitrogen as hetero atom the heterocyclic ring being a five-membered aromatic ring containing at least one nitrogen atom containing at least two nitrogen atoms
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/52—Liquid crystal materials characterised by components which are not liquid crystals, e.g. additives with special physical aspect: solvents, solid particles
- C09K19/54—Additives having no specific mesophase characterised by their chemical composition
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/52—Liquid crystal materials characterised by components which are not liquid crystals, e.g. additives with special physical aspect: solvents, solid particles
- C09K19/58—Dopants or charge transfer agents
- C09K19/586—Optically active dopants; chiral dopants
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B5/00—Optical elements other than lenses
- G02B5/20—Filters
- G02B5/201—Filters in the form of arrays
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
- G02F1/1335—Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
- G02F1/133509—Filters, e.g. light shielding masks
- G02F1/133512—Light shielding layers, e.g. black matrix
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/133—Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
- G02F1/1333—Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
- G02F1/1335—Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
- G02F1/133509—Filters, e.g. light shielding masks
- G02F1/133514—Colour filters
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/04—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
- C09K2019/0444—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit characterized by a linking chain between rings or ring systems, a bridging chain between extensive mesogenic moieties or an end chain group
- C09K2019/0448—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit characterized by a linking chain between rings or ring systems, a bridging chain between extensive mesogenic moieties or an end chain group the end chain group being a polymerizable end group, e.g. -Sp-P or acrylate
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/04—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
- C09K2019/0444—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit characterized by a linking chain between rings or ring systems, a bridging chain between extensive mesogenic moieties or an end chain group
- C09K2019/0466—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit characterized by a linking chain between rings or ring systems, a bridging chain between extensive mesogenic moieties or an end chain group the linking chain being a -CF2O- chain
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/04—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
- C09K19/06—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds
- C09K19/08—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings
- C09K19/10—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing at least two benzene rings
- C09K19/14—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing at least two benzene rings linked by a carbon chain
- C09K19/18—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing at least two benzene rings linked by a carbon chain the chain containing carbon-to-carbon triple bonds, e.g. tolans
- C09K2019/181—Ph-C≡C-Ph
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/04—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
- C09K19/06—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds
- C09K19/08—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings
- C09K19/10—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing at least two benzene rings
- C09K19/20—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing at least two benzene rings linked by a chain containing carbon and oxygen atoms as chain links, e.g. esters or ethers
- C09K19/2007—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing at least two benzene rings linked by a chain containing carbon and oxygen atoms as chain links, e.g. esters or ethers the chain containing -COO- or -OCO- groups
- C09K2019/2042—Ph-Ph-COO-Ph
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/04—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
- C09K19/06—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds
- C09K19/08—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings
- C09K19/10—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing at least two benzene rings
- C09K19/20—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing at least two benzene rings linked by a chain containing carbon and oxygen atoms as chain links, e.g. esters or ethers
- C09K19/2007—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing at least two benzene rings linked by a chain containing carbon and oxygen atoms as chain links, e.g. esters or ethers the chain containing -COO- or -OCO- groups
- C09K2019/2078—Ph-COO-Ph-COO-Ph
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/04—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
- C09K19/06—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds
- C09K19/08—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings
- C09K19/30—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing saturated or unsaturated non-aromatic rings, e.g. cyclohexane rings
- C09K19/3001—Cyclohexane rings
- C09K19/3003—Compounds containing at least two rings in which the different rings are directly linked (covalent bond)
- C09K2019/301—Cy-Cy-Ph
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/04—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
- C09K19/06—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds
- C09K19/08—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings
- C09K19/30—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing saturated or unsaturated non-aromatic rings, e.g. cyclohexane rings
- C09K19/3001—Cyclohexane rings
- C09K19/3028—Cyclohexane rings in which at least two rings are linked by a carbon chain containing carbon to carbon single bonds
- C09K2019/304—Cy-C2H4-Ph-Ph
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/04—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
- C09K19/06—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds
- C09K19/08—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings
- C09K19/30—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing saturated or unsaturated non-aromatic rings, e.g. cyclohexane rings
- C09K19/3001—Cyclohexane rings
- C09K19/3059—Cyclohexane rings in which at least two rings are linked by a carbon chain containing carbon to carbon triple bonds
- C09K2019/3063—Cy-Ph-C≡C-Ph
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/04—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
- C09K19/06—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds
- C09K19/08—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings
- C09K19/30—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least two non-condensed rings containing saturated or unsaturated non-aromatic rings, e.g. cyclohexane rings
- C09K19/3001—Cyclohexane rings
- C09K19/3066—Cyclohexane rings in which the rings are linked by a chain containing carbon and oxygen atoms, e.g. esters or ethers
- C09K19/3068—Cyclohexane rings in which the rings are linked by a chain containing carbon and oxygen atoms, e.g. esters or ethers chain containing -COO- or -OCO- groups
- C09K2019/3083—Cy-Ph-COO-Ph
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/04—Liquid crystal materials characterised by the chemical structure of the liquid crystal components, e.g. by a specific unit
- C09K19/06—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds
- C09K19/34—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least one heterocyclic ring
- C09K19/3402—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least one heterocyclic ring having oxygen as hetero atom
- C09K2019/3422—Non-steroidal liquid crystal compounds containing at least one heterocyclic ring having oxygen as hetero atom the heterocyclic ring being a six-membered ring
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09K—MATERIALS FOR MISCELLANEOUS APPLICATIONS, NOT PROVIDED FOR ELSEWHERE
- C09K19/00—Liquid crystal materials
- C09K19/52—Liquid crystal materials characterised by components which are not liquid crystals, e.g. additives with special physical aspect: solvents, solid particles
- C09K2019/523—Organic solid particles
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02F—OPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
- G02F1/00—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
- G02F1/01—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour
- G02F1/13—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
- G02F1/137—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells characterised by the electro-optical or magneto-optical effect, e.g. field-induced phase transition, orientation effect, guest-host interaction or dynamic scattering
- G02F1/13718—Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells characterised by the electro-optical or magneto-optical effect, e.g. field-induced phase transition, orientation effect, guest-host interaction or dynamic scattering based on a change of the texture state of a cholesteric liquid crystal
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a liquid crystal display device.
- Liquid crystal display devices are used in various electric appliances for home use, measuring instruments, automotive panels, word processors, electronic notebooks, printers, computers, televisions, etc., including clocks and calculators.
- Typical liquid crystal display methods include TN (twisted nematic), STN (super twisted nematic), DS (dynamic light scattering), GH (guest / host), and IPS (in-plane switching).
- Type OCB (optical compensation birefringence) type, ECB (voltage controlled birefringence) type, VA (vertical alignment) type, CSH (color super homeotropic) type, FLC (ferroelectric liquid crystal), etc.
- As a driving method multiplex driving is generally used instead of conventional static driving, and the active matrix (AM) method driven by a TFT (thin film transistor), TFD (thin film diode) or the like has become mainstream recently. ing.
- TFT thin film transistor
- TFD thin film diode
- a general color liquid crystal display device has a transparent electrode layer (a common electrode) between one alignment film of two substrates (1) each having an alignment film (4) and the substrate. 3a) and a color filter layer (2), a pixel electrode layer (3b) is provided between the other alignment film and the substrate, these substrates are arranged so that the alignment films face each other, and a liquid crystal layer ( 5) is sandwiched.
- the color filter layer is composed of a color filter composed of a black matrix, a red colored layer (R), a green colored layer (G), a blue colored layer (B), and, if necessary, a yellow colored layer (Y).
- the liquid crystal material constituting the liquid crystal layer has been subjected to a high degree of management because impurities greatly affect the electrical characteristics of the display device if the impurities remain in the material.
- the material for forming the alignment film it is already known that the alignment film directly affects the liquid crystal layer and the impurities remaining in the alignment film move to the liquid crystal layer, thereby affecting the electrical characteristics of the liquid crystal layer.
- the characteristics of the liquid crystal display device due to the impurities in the alignment film material are being studied.
- the material such as the organic pigment used for the color filter layer is also assumed to have an influence on the liquid crystal layer due to impurities contained in the same manner as the alignment film material.
- the alignment film is usually only 0.1 ⁇ m or less in thickness, and the common electrode used on the color filter layer side for the transparent electrode is usually 0.5 ⁇ m or less even if the film thickness is increased to increase the conductivity. . Therefore, it cannot be said that the color filter layer and the liquid crystal layer are in a completely isolated environment, and the color filter layer is liquid crystal display device due to impurities contained in the color filter layer through the alignment film and the transparent electrode.
- the elution of impurities into the liquid crystal is controlled by using pigments whose ratio of the extract of ethyl formate is not more than a specific value.
- a method (Patent Document 1) and a method (Patent Document 2) for controlling the elution of impurities into a liquid crystal by specifying a pigment in a blue colored layer have been studied. However, these methods are not significantly different from simply reducing impurities in the pigment, and are insufficient as an improvement to solve display defects even in the current state of progress in pigment purification technology. Met.
- the difficulty of dissolving the organic impurities in the liquid crystal layer is expressed by the hydrophobic parameter of the liquid crystal molecules contained in the liquid crystal layer. Because of the correlation between the parameter value and the hydrophobic parameter and the —OCF 3 group at the end of the liquid crystal molecule, a liquid crystal compound having —OCF 3 group at the end of the liquid crystal molecule is contained in a certain proportion or more.
- Patent Document 3 A method for producing a liquid crystal composition.
- An object of the present invention is to provide a liquid crystal display device that solves the problem of display defects.
- Liquid crystal display device using a color filter using dyes and / or pigments with a specific structure prevents a decrease in the voltage holding ratio (VHR) of the liquid crystal layer, resulting in poor display such as white spots, alignment unevenness, and burn-in As a result, the present invention was completed.
- VHR voltage holding ratio
- the present invention includes a first substrate, a second substrate, a liquid crystal layer sandwiched between the first substrate and the second substrate, a black matrix, and at least an RGB three-color pixel portion.
- a color filter, a pixel electrode, and a common electrode are provided, and the liquid crystal layer includes a nematic liquid crystal composition including at least two achiral liquid crystal compounds and a chiral liquid crystal-containing material including at least one chiral compound.
- the RGB three-color pixel portion includes, as a color material, a diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment and / or an anionic red organic dye in the R pixel portion, a copper halide phthalocyanine pigment, a phthalocyanine green dye, and a phthalocyanine type in the G pixel portion.
- a liquid crystal display device comprising at least one selected from the group consisting of a mixture of a blue dye and an azo yellow organic dye, the B pixel portion containing an ⁇ -type copper phthalocyanine pigment and / or a cationic blue organic dye I will provide a.
- the liquid crystal display device of the present invention can prevent a decrease in the voltage holding ratio (VHR) of the liquid crystal layer by using a color filter using a chiral liquid crystal-containing material and a specific dye and / or pigment. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of display defects such as uneven alignment and baking.
- VHR voltage holding ratio
- the first substrate (1a) includes a color filter layer (2a) containing a specific dye and / or pigment
- the second substrate (1b) includes a transparent electrode layer (3a) serving as a common electrode and A transparent electrode layer (3b) serving as a pixel electrode is provided.
- 2a is disposed on one side and 3a and 3b are opposed to each other, and a chiral liquid crystal-containing material is contained therebetween.
- the liquid crystal phase (5a) is sandwiched.
- the transparent electrode layers 3a and 3b are alternately arranged on the second substrate (1b) so that the comb teeth of one electrode mesh with the comb teeth of the other electrode in a substantially horizontal direction.
- the two substrates in the display device are bonded together by a sealing material and a sealing material disposed in the peripheral region, and in many cases, formed by a granular spacer or a photolithography method in order to maintain a distance between the substrates.
- Spacer pillars made of the prepared resin are arranged.
- the “alkylene group” is a divalent group “— (CH 2 ) n —” obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from each carbon atom at both ends of an aliphatic linear hydrocarbon. (Where n is an integer of 1 or more), and the substitution of a hydrogen atom with a halogen atom or an alkyl group, or a methylene group (—CH 2 —) with an oxygen atom (—O—), a sulfur atom (— When there is substitution with S-), -CO-, -COO-, or -OCO-, etc., this fact is specifically refused.
- the “number of carbon atoms of the alkylene group” refers to n in the general formula “— (CH 2 ) n —” of the “alkylene group”.
- the liquid crystal layer in the liquid crystal display device of the present invention is composed of a nematic liquid crystal composition containing at least two types of achiral liquid crystalline compounds and a chiral liquid crystal-containing material containing at least one type of chiral compound.
- the nematic liquid crystal composition used for the chiral liquid crystal-containing material of the present invention contains at least two kinds of achiral liquid crystal compounds.
- the liquid crystalline compound is not particularly limited as long as it is an achiral compound having a mesogenic moiety (mesogenic group) exhibiting liquid crystallinity, and known liquid crystalline compounds and those appropriately modified from them. Can be used.
- the nematic liquid crystal composition used for the chiral liquid crystal-containing material of the present invention preferably contains a compound represented by the general formula (I).
- the compound represented by the general formula (I) is a liquid crystal compound having a relatively small absolute value of ⁇ .
- R 11 and R 12 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 16 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 16 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 16 carbon atoms, or 1 represents an alkenyloxy group having 2 to 16 carbon atoms, and one or more methylene groups not adjacent to each other in R 11 or R 12 are such that oxygen atoms or sulfur atoms are not directly bonded to each other.
- Each independently may be substituted with —O—, —S—, —CO—, —COO— or —OCO—, and one or more hydrogen atoms in R 11 or R 12 are May be substituted with a fluorine atom
- a 11 , A 12 and A 13 are each independently (A) trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group (one methylene group present in the group or two or more methylene groups not adjacent to each other independently represent an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom) 1 or 2 or more hydrogen atoms present in the group may be each independently substituted with a cyano group, a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom).
- a 1,4-phenylene group (one —CH ⁇ present in the group or two or more —CH ⁇ not adjacent to each other may be substituted with a nitrogen atom; 1 or 2 or more hydrogen atoms present may be each independently substituted with a cyano group, a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.), Or (c) a 1,4-cyclohexenylene group, 1 , 4-bicyclo (2.2.2) octylene group, naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, and 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6- A group selected from the group consisting of diyl groups (one —CH ⁇ present in these groups or two or more —CH ⁇ not adjacent to each other may be substituted with a nitrogen atom; One or more hydrogen atoms present in the group are each Each independently substituted with a cyano group, a fluorine atom or
- R 11 and R 12 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 16 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 16 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 16 carbon atoms, or carbon.
- An alkenyloxy group having 2 to 16 atoms is represented.
- These alkyl groups, alkoxyl groups, alkenyl groups, or alkenyloxy groups are independently defined as those in which one or two or more methylene groups that are not adjacent to each other do not have an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom directly bonded to each other.
- R 11 and R 12 may be the same or different, but R 11 and R 12 in the same molecule are more preferably different.
- R 11 and R 12 are each independently an alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, or 2 to 15 carbon atoms.
- An alkenyloxy group having 2 to 10 atoms is more preferable, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, or an alkyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms.
- R 11 and R 12 may each be a branched chain group or a linear group, but are preferably a linear group.
- R 11 and R 12 are alkenyl groups, any of the groups shown below is particularly preferable. In the following groups, it shall be connected to the ring structure at the right end. Among these, a vinyl group or 3-butenyl group is more preferable, and a vinyl group is particularly preferable.
- a 11 represents 0, 1 or 2.
- a 11 is preferably 0 or 1.
- a 11 , A 12 and A 13 are each independently the following (a) group, (b) group or (c) group. When a 11 is 2 and two A 13 are present, they may be the same or different.
- (A) trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group one methylene group present in the group or two or more methylene groups not adjacent to each other independently represent an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom
- 1 or 2 or more hydrogen atoms present in the group may be each independently substituted with a cyano group, a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
- a 1,4-phenylene group (one —CH ⁇ present in the group or two or more —CH ⁇ not adjacent to each other may be substituted with a nitrogen atom;
- One or two or more hydrogen atoms present may be each independently substituted with a cyano group, a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
- the group (a) is an unsubstituted or trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group in which one or more hydrogen atoms are each independently substituted with a cyano group, a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom. More preferred is an unsubstituted 1,4-cyclohexylene group in which one or more hydrogen atoms are each independently substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, and unsubstituted trans-1 More preferred is a 1,4-cyclohexylene group.
- the group (b) is preferably any group represented by the following formulas (b) -1 to 7.
- One or two or more hydrogen atoms in these groups may each independently be substituted with a cyano group, a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
- an unsubstituted 1,4-phenylene group [formula (b) -1], a 1,4-phenylene group in which one or more hydrogen atoms are each independently substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom
- an unsubstituted pyrimidine-2,5-diyl group [formula (b) -3], wherein the unsubstituted 1,4-phenylene group or one or more hydrogen atoms are each independently fluorine.
- More preferred is a 1,4-phenylene group substituted by an atom or a chlorine atom.
- Examples of the group (c) include 1,4-cyclohexenylene group, 1,4-bicyclo (2.2.2) octylene group, piperidine-1,4-diyl group, naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, Decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group and 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group are preferred.
- One or two or more hydrogen atoms in these groups may each independently be substituted with a cyano group, a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
- a 11 , A 12 and A 13 are each independently preferably the group (a) or the group (b), and trans-1,4-cyclohexylene.
- at least one of A 11 , A 12 and A 13 is preferably a trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group or a 1,4-phenylene group.
- L 11 and L 12 are each independently a single bond, —CH 2 CH 2 —, — (CH 2 ) 4 —, —OCH 2 —, —CH 2.
- a single bond —CH 2 CH 2 —, — (CH 2 ) 4 —, —COO—, —OCO—, —OCF 2 —, —CF 2 O—, —CH ⁇ CH—, or —C ⁇ C—
- a single bond —CH 2 CH 2 —, —CH ⁇ CH—, —OCF 2 —, —CF 2 O—, —CH ⁇ CH—, or —C ⁇ C — Is more preferable
- a single bond, —CH 2 CH 2 —, —CH ⁇ CH—, —OCF 2 —, —CF 2 O—, or —C ⁇ C— is more preferable, and a single bond or —C ⁇ C— Is even more preferable.
- at least one of L 11 and L 12 is preferably a single bond.
- R 11 and R 12 are the same as in the general formula (I).
- R 11 and R 12 may be the same or different, but R 11 and R 12 in the same molecule are more preferably different.
- R 11 and R 12 are each an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, or 2 to 8 carbon atoms. Or an alkenyloxy group having 3 to 16 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or an alkenyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms. .
- R 11 and R 12 may each be a branched chain group or a linear group, but are preferably a linear group.
- R 11 and R 12 are alkenyl groups, vinyl groups or 3-butenyl groups are more preferable, and vinyl groups are particularly preferable.
- each A 14 independently represents a 1,4-phenylene group in which one or two or more hydrogen atoms may be substituted by fluorine atoms, or one or two It represents a trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group in which one or more hydrogen atoms may be substituted with a fluorine atom.
- a 14 present in a molecule may be the same as or different from each other.
- Compounds represented by the general formulas (Ia) to (Ih) include trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,4-phenylene group, 2-fluoro-1,4-phenylene group, 3-fluoro- A 1,4-phenylene group or a 3,5-difluoro-1,4-phenylene group is preferred, and a trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group or a 1,4-phenylene group is more preferred.
- L 13 represents —CH 2 CH 2 —, — (CH 2 ) 4 —, —OCH 2 —, —CH 2 O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —OCF. 2 —, —CF 2 O—, —CH ⁇ NN—CH—, —CH ⁇ CH—, —CF ⁇ CF— or —C ⁇ C— is represented.
- L 13 is —CH 2 CH 2 —, — (CH 2 ) 4 —, —COO—, —OCO—, —CH ⁇ CH—, Or, —C ⁇ C— is preferable, and —CH 2 CH 2 —, —CH ⁇ CH—, or —C ⁇ C— is more preferable.
- the compound represented by the general formula (Ia) compounds represented by the following general formulas (Ia-1) to (Ia-3) are preferable.
- the compound represented by the general formula (Id) compounds represented by the following general formulas (Id-1) to (Id-3) are preferable.
- the compound represented by the general formula (Ib) compounds represented by the following general formulas (Ib-1) to (Ib-6) are preferable.
- the compound represented by the general formula (Ie) a compound represented by the following general formula (Ie-1) is preferable.
- the compound represented by the general formula (If) the following general formula (If-1) Compounds represented by (If-2) are preferred.
- Formulas (Ia-1) to (Ia-3), (Id-1) to (Id-3), (Ib-1) to (Ib-6), (Ie-1), (If-1) to In (If-2), R 11 and R 12 are the same as in general formula (I), respectively, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and 2 to An alkenyl group having 8 carbon atoms or an alkenyloxy group having 3 to 16 carbon atoms is preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or an alkenyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable. preferable.
- the nematic liquid crystal composition used in the present invention contains a compound represented by the general formula (I), it may contain only one type, or may contain two or more types in combination.
- the nematic liquid crystal composition used in the present invention preferably contains all eight types of compounds represented by the general formulas (Ia) to (Ih), and among the general formulas (Ia) to (Ih) More preferably, it contains 1 to 6 kinds of compounds, and more preferably contains 1 to 4 kinds of compounds among the general formulas (Ia) to (Ih).
- a compound represented by one or more general formulas (Ia), a compound represented by one or more general formulas (Ib), and one or more general formulas (Id) contains one or more compounds represented by general formula (Ie) and one or more compounds represented by general formula (If).
- the content of the compound represented by the general formula (I) in the nematic liquid crystal composition is 5 to 95% by mass.
- the range of 10 to 90% by mass is more preferable.
- the nematic liquid crystal composition used in the chiral liquid crystal-containing material of the present invention preferably contains at least one compound represented by the general formula (II).
- the compound represented by the general formula (II) is a liquid crystal compound having a relatively large ⁇ .
- R 21 represents an alkyl group, an alkoxy group having 1 to 16 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group, or an alkenyloxy group having from 2 to 16 carbon atoms of 2 to 16 carbon atoms having 1 to 16 carbon atoms, wherein R 21 One methylene group present therein or two or more methylene groups not adjacent to each other are each independently substituted with —O—, —S—, —CO—, —COO— or —OCO—.
- R 21 may be independently substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom
- R 21 in the general formula (II) is an alkyl group having 1 to 16 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 16 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 16 carbon atoms, or an alkenyl group having 2 to 16 carbon atoms.
- One methylene group present in these groups or two or more methylene groups that are not adjacent to each other are each independently —O—, —S—, —CO—, —COO— or —OCO—. May be substituted.
- One or two or more hydrogen atoms present in these groups may each independently be substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
- R 21 is preferably a methylene group or a group in which a hydrogen atom is not substituted.
- an alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 15 carbon atoms, or an alkenyloxy group having 2 to 15 carbon atoms is preferable. More preferably, an alkyl group having 10 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, or an alkenyloxy group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
- R 21 may be a branched group or a linear group, but is preferably a linear group.
- a 21 represents 0, 1, 2 or 3.
- a 21 is preferably 0 or 1.
- a 21 , A 22 and A 23 in the general formula (II) are the same as A 11 , A 12 and A 13 in the general formula (I). That is, A 21 , A 22 and A 23 are each independently the group (a), the group (b), or the group (c). When a 21 is 2 and two A 22 are present, they may be the same or different.
- a 21 , A 22 and A 23 in the general formula (II) are the group (a), they are unsubstituted, or one or two or more hydrogen atoms are each independently a cyano group, a fluorine atom or A trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group substituted with a chlorine atom is preferred, unsubstituted or one or two or more hydrogen atoms are each independently substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
- 4-cyclohexylene group is more preferable, and unsubstituted trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group is more preferable.
- any group represented by the formulas (b) -1 to 7 is preferable.
- One or two or more hydrogen atoms in these groups may each independently be substituted with a cyano group, a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
- an unsubstituted 1,4-phenylene group, a 1,4-phenylene group in which one or more hydrogen atoms are each independently substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, or an unsubstituted pyrimidine-2 , 5-diyl groups are preferred.
- a 21 , A 22 and A 23 in the general formula (II) are the group (c), decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, or 1,2, A 3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group is preferred.
- One or two or more hydrogen atoms in these groups may each independently be substituted with a cyano group, a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
- an unsubstituted decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, an unsubstituted naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, one or more hydrogen atoms are each independently substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
- a naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, an unsubstituted 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, or one or more hydrogen atoms are each independently a fluorine atom or A 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group substituted with a chlorine atom is preferred.
- a 21 , A 22 and A 23 are each independently a trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,4-phenylene group, 2-fluoro-1 , 4-phenylene group, 3-fluoro-1,4-phenylene group, 3,5-difluoro-1,4-phenylene group, decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, 5-fluoro-naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, 5,7-difluoro-naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, 4,5-difluoro-naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, 4,5,7-tri group Fluoro-naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, 5-fluoro-1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-di
- L 21 and L 22 are each independently a single bond, —CH 2 CH 2 —, — (CH 2 ) 4 —, —OCH 2 —, —CH 2.
- X 21 represents a hydrogen atom, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a cyano group, a trifluoromethyl group, a fluoromethoxy group, a difluoromethoxy group, a trifluoromethoxy group, or 2,2,2-trifluoro. Represents an ethyl group.
- X 21 is preferably a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a trifluoromethyl group, a fluoromethoxy group, a difluoromethoxy group, or a trifluoromethoxy group, and a fluorine atom or a cyano group is More preferred.
- R 21 , A 21 , A 22 , a 21 , L 21 , L 22 , and X 21 are the same as those in the general formula (II), and X 22 , X 23 , X 24 , X 25 , X 26 , X 27 , and X 28 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom.
- a compound represented by the following general formula (IIa-1) is preferable.
- R 21 , X 21 , X 22 , and X 23 are the same as in general formula (IIa), respectively, and
- a 24 is a trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group or 1 , 4-phenylene group (one or two or more hydrogen atoms present in the group may each independently be substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom), and
- a 25 represents trans 1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,4-phenylene group, decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2, 6-diyl group or pyrimidine-2,5-diyl group (one or two or more hydrogen atoms present in these groups may each independently be substituted with a fluorine
- a 22 is 0, xylene group A 25 is trans-1,4-cyclohexylene, 1,4-phenylene group, 2-fluoro-1,4-phenylene group , A 3-fluoro-1,4-phenylene group or a 3,5-difluoro-1,4-phenylene group, and L 24 is a single bond, —CH 2 CH 2 —, — (CH 2 ) 4 —, — A compound wherein OCH 2 —, —CH 2 O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —OCF 2 —, —CF 2 O—, —CH ⁇ CH—, or —C ⁇ C—.
- a 22 is 0, and A 25 is decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, 1,2,3,4- Tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group or pyrimidine-2,5-diyl group (one or two or more hydrogen atoms present in these groups are each independently replaced by a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom) And L 24 is a single bond.
- a 22 is 1, and A 24 and A 25 are each independently trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,4-phenylene group, 2-fluoro.
- L 23 and L 24 are each independently a single bond, —CH 2 CH 2 —, —OCH 2 —, —CH 2 O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —OCF 2 —, —CF 2 O—, —CH ⁇ CH—, or —C ⁇ C— .
- a 22 is 1, xylene group A 24 is trans-1,4-cyclohexylene, 1,4-phenylene group, 2-fluoro-1,4-phenylene group , A 3-fluoro-1,4-phenylene group or a 3,5-difluoro-1,4-phenylene group, and A 25 is a decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, a naphthalene-2,6-diyl group 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group or pyrimidine-2,5-diyl group (one or more hydrogen atoms present in these groups are each independently And may be substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.), And L 23 and L 24 are single bonds.
- a 22 is 2, and two A 24 and one A 25 are each independently a trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,4- A phenylene group, a 2-fluoro-1,4-phenylene group, a 3-fluoro-1,4-phenylene group, or a 3,5-difluoro-1,4-phenylene group, L 23 is a single bond, and L 24 is a single bond, —CH 2 CH 2 —, — (CH 2 ) 4 —, —OCH 2 —, —CH 2 O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —OCF 2 —, —CF 2 O—, A compound in which —CH ⁇ CH— or —C ⁇ C—.
- the compounds represented by the general formula (IIa-1) include the following general formulas (IIa-2a) to (IIa-2v) and general formulas (IIa-3a) to (IIa-3x). And compounds represented by general formulas (IIa-3′a) to (IIa-3′z) and general formulas (IIa-4a) to (IIa-4s).
- R 21 is the same as in the general formula (IIa), and is an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, carbon
- An alkenyl group having 2 to 8 atoms or an alkenyloxy group having 3 to 16 carbon atoms is preferable, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or an alkyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms.
- An alkenyl group is more preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms is more preferable.
- X 21 is the same as in the general formula (IIa), and is a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a trifluoromethyl group, a fluoromethoxy group, a difluoromethoxy group, Or a trifluoromethoxy group is preferable, a fluorine atom or a cyano group is more preferable, and a cyano group is more preferable.
- X 22 and X 23 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom.
- the compounds represented by the general formula (IIb) are represented by the following general formulas (IIb-2a) to (IIb-2c) and general formulas (IIb-3a) to (IIb-3e).
- Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (IIc) include the following general formulas (IIc-2a) to (IIc-2c) and general formulas (IIc-3a) to (IIc-3e).
- R 21 is the same as in the general formulas (IIb) and (IIc), an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
- An alkoxy group, an alkenyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms, or an alkenyloxy group having 3 to 16 carbon atoms is preferable, an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or the number of carbon atoms
- An alkenyl group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms is further preferable.
- X 21 is the same as in the general formulas (IIb) and (IIc), and is a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a trifluoromethyl group, a fluoromethoxy group, A difluoromethoxy group or a trifluoromethoxy group is preferable, a fluorine atom or a cyano group is more preferable, and a cyano group is more preferable.
- X 22 and X 23 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom.
- the nematic liquid crystal composition used in the present invention contains a compound represented by the general formula (II), it may contain only one type, or may contain two or more types in combination.
- the nematic liquid crystal composition used in the present invention preferably contains one or more compounds selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by the general formulas (IIa) to (IIc), and at least one or It is more preferable to contain two or more kinds of compounds represented by the general formula (IIa), and it is more preferred to contain one or more kinds of compounds represented by the general formula (IIa-1).
- the content of the compound represented by the general formula (II) in the nematic liquid crystal composition is 5 to 95% by mass.
- the range of 10 to 90% by mass is more preferable.
- nematic liquid crystal composition used in the present invention a composition containing at least one of the compound represented by the general formula (I) and the compound represented by the general formula (II) is preferable, and a composition containing both is more preferable. preferable. In the latter case, it is more preferable to contain 10 to 50% by mass of the compound represented by the general formula (I) and 50 to 90% by mass of the compound represented by the general formula (II). Furthermore, as the nematic liquid crystal composition used in the present invention, the content of the liquid crystalline compound containing more benzene skeleton than the cyclohexane skeleton in the molecule is 50% by mass or more of the total liquid crystalline compound in the nematic liquid crystal composition.
- liquid crystal composition that exhibits an optically isotropic phase, particularly a blue phase, is easily obtained by adding a chiral compound.
- the content of the liquid crystalline compound containing more benzene skeletons than the cyclohexane skeleton in the molecule is 50% by mass or more with respect to the entire liquid crystalline compound in the nematic liquid crystal composition, and the cyclohexane skeleton present in the molecule
- a nematic liquid crystal composition having a content of 1 to 50% by mass of a liquid crystal compound having a number of benzene skeletons equal to or greater than that of the benzene skeleton is preferred.
- the “benzene skeleton” includes not only a ring structure consisting of only carbon atoms and hydrogen atoms (phenyl group, 1,4-phenylene group), but also one or more hydrogen atoms in the ring structure. Also included are ring structures each independently substituted with another group (eg, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, etc.).
- the “cyclohexane skeleton” includes not only a ring structure consisting of only carbon atoms and hydrogen atoms (cyclohexyl group, trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group), but also one methylene group present in the ring structure.
- a ring structure in which two or more methylene groups not adjacent to each other are substituted with oxygen atoms eg, 4-tetrahydropyranyl group, 1,4-dioxanyl group, 1,3-dioxanyl group, tetrahydropyran-2 , 5-diyl group, 1,3-dioxane-2,5-diyl group, and the like, and one or two or more hydrogen atoms in these ring structures are each independently another group (for example, a halogen atom) , Alkyl groups, alkoxy groups, etc.).
- oxygen atoms eg, 4-tetrahydropyranyl group, 1,4-dioxanyl group, 1,3-dioxanyl group, tetrahydropyran-2 , 5-diyl group, 1,3-dioxane-2,5-diyl group, and the like
- one or two or more hydrogen atoms in these ring structures are each independently
- the nematic liquid crystal composition used in the present invention preferably exhibits a nematic liquid crystal phase in a temperature range of at least ⁇ 10 ° C. to 50 ° C.
- a chiral liquid crystal-containing material that exhibits a blue phase at a lower temperature and in a wide temperature range can be obtained.
- a chiral liquid crystal-containing material of the present invention is prepared by preparing a composition in which a nematic liquid crystal composition, a chiral compound, and at least one polymerizable compound are mixed in advance, and a polymerizable group in the composition. In the case of producing by polymerizing a compound having the above, it can be polymerized at a low temperature so that unintended thermal polymerization is not induced, and the handling property is excellent.
- the nematic liquid crystal composition used in the present invention may have a negative or positive dielectric anisotropy ( ⁇ ).
- ⁇ dielectric anisotropy
- fluorine atoms are introduced in a direction perpendicular to the long axis direction of the molecule, so that the symmetry with respect to the long axis of the molecule is deteriorated, crystallization is difficult, and the melting point is lowered. This is preferable because the temperature range of the liquid crystal can be expanded.
- the dielectric anisotropy ( ⁇ ) is positive, the refractive index is distorted in one direction along the direction of the electric field by applying an electric field, which is preferable in that the anisotropy of the refractive index is easily exhibited.
- the absolute value of dielectric anisotropy is large.
- a nematic liquid crystal composition having a negative dielectric anisotropy ( ⁇ ) a chiral liquid crystal-containing material having a negative dielectric anisotropy ( ⁇ ) can be obtained.
- a chiral liquid crystal-containing material having a positive dielectric anisotropy ( ⁇ ) can be obtained by using a nematic liquid crystal composition having a positive dielectric anisotropy ( ⁇ ).
- a chiral liquid crystal-containing material having a large absolute value of dielectric anisotropy can be obtained.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material of the present invention contains at least one kind of chiral compound.
- a twisted alignment is induced in the nematic liquid crystal composition, and a liquid crystal composition that exhibits a cholesteric phase or a blue phase having a desired pitch is obtained.
- the pitch indicates the length of one period in the helical structure of the liquid crystal molecules.
- the chiral compound may be a compound having an asymmetric atom, a compound having axial asymmetry, or a compound having plane asymmetry. Moreover, the said chiral compound may have a polymeric group and does not need to have a polymeric group.
- a compound having an asymmetric atom or a compound having axial asymmetry is preferable, and a compound having an asymmetric atom is particularly preferable.
- the compound having an asymmetric atom include a compound having an asymmetric carbon in a side chain portion, a compound having an asymmetric carbon in a ring structure portion, and a compound having both.
- the asymmetric atom is an asymmetric carbon atom, in which steric inversion hardly occurs, but the hetero atom may be an asymmetric atom.
- the asymmetric atom may be introduced into a part of the chain structure or may be introduced into a part of the cyclic structure.
- a compound having axial asymmetry is preferred when a strong helical induction force is particularly required.
- the compound having an asymmetric atom is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (Ch-I).
- R 100 and R 101 are each independently a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, —NO 2 , a halogen atom, —OCN, —SCN, —SF 5 , a carbon atom number of 1 to 30
- a chiral or achiral alkyl group one or more non-adjacent methylene groups in the alkyl group each independently represents —O— as an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom not directly bonded to each other).
- —S— —NH—, —N (CH 3 ) —, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —OCO—O—, —S—CO—, —CO—S—, —CH ⁇
- Each hydrogen atom is independently a halogen atom or a cyano group.
- (B ′) a 1,4-phenylene group (one —CH ⁇ present in the group or two or more non-adjacent —CH ⁇ may be substituted with a nitrogen atom), or (C ′) 1,4-cyclohexenylene group, 1,4-bicyclo [2.2.2] octylene group, indan-2,5-diyl, naphthalene-2,6-diyl group, decahydronaphthalene-2 , 6-diyl group and 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group (one methylene group present in these groups or two or more methylene groups which are not adjacent to each other, Independently, it may be substituted with an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom, and one —CH ⁇ or two or more non-adjacent —CH ⁇ present in these groups is substituted with a nitrogen atom.
- n 11 represents 0 or 1
- D is a divalent group represented by the following formulas (D1) to (D4) (in formulas (D1) to (D4), an asterisk (*) represents a chiral carbon atom, , Z 101 (or R 100 ) or Z 101 (or R 100 ), respectively. )
- R 100 and R 101 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a cyano group, —NO 2 , a halogen atom, —OCN, —SCN, —SF 5 , or 1 to 30 carbon atoms. Or a chiral group containing a chiral or achiral alkyl group, a polymerizable group, or a ring structure. When n 11 is 0, at least one of R 100 and R 101 is a chiral alkyl group.
- R 100 or R 101 in the general formula (Ch-I) is a chiral or achiral alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, one or more non-adjacent methylenes in the alkyl group
- the groups (—CH 2 —) each independently represent —O—, —S—, —NH—, —N (CH 3 ) —, —CO— as those in which oxygen atoms or sulfur atoms are not directly bonded to each other.
- the alkyl group may be a linear group, a branched chain group, or a group containing a ring structure.
- R 100 or R 101 are bonded to A 100 (or D, Z 101 ) or A 101 (or D, Z 100 ) at the left end, respectively.
- R 103 and R 104 each independently represents a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, or a hydrogen atom.
- R 103 was subjected to a carbon atom to R 103 are bonded (* R 103 is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms so that the (position) is an asymmetric atom.
- One or two or more methylene groups of the alkyl group independently represent —O—, —S—, —NH—, —N (CH 3) as those in which oxygen atoms or sulfur atoms are not directly bonded to each other.
- )-, -CO-, -CO-O-, -O-CO-, -O-CO-O-, -S-CO-, -CO-S-, -O-SO 2- , -SO 2- O—, —CH ⁇ CH—, —C ⁇ C—, a cyclopropylene group, or —Si (CH 3 ) 2 — may be substituted, and one or more hydrogen atoms of the alkyl group may be Independently, it may be substituted with a halogen atom (for example, a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom) or a cyano group.
- the alkyl group may have a polymerizable group. Examples of the polymeriz
- R 103 in the general formulas (Ra) to (Rj) is a linear or branched group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms in which a methylene group or a hydrogen atom is not substituted with another group (ie, unsubstituted). It is preferably a branched alkyl group, more preferably an unsubstituted straight chain or branched alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and an unsubstituted straight chain having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. More preferably, the alkyl group is in the form of a ring.
- R 104 in the general formula (Rd) or (Ri) is preferably a hydrogen atom or an unsubstituted linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. It is more preferably a straight-chain alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
- n 12 is an integer of 0 to 20, preferably an integer of 0 to 10, more preferably an integer of 0 to 5, and still more preferably 0.
- n 13 is 0 or 1.
- n 14 is an integer of 0-5.
- X 101 and X 102 each independently represent a halogen atom (a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, an iodine atom), a cyano group, or a phenyl group (1 of the phenyl group).
- One or more arbitrary hydrogen atoms may be independently substituted with a halogen atom, a methyl group, a methoxy group, a trifluoromethyl group (—CF 3 ), or a trifluoromethoxy group (—OCF 3 ).
- the carbon atom to which X 101 is bonded is an asymmetric atom.
- X 101 and R 103 are groups different from each other.
- X 101 and X 102 are groups different from each other so that the carbon atom to which X 101 is bonded (position marked with *) is an asymmetric atom.
- X 101 and X 102 in the general formulas (Ra), (Rb), (Rc), (Rf), (Rg), (Rh), and (Rk) are each independently a halogen atom, a phenyl group ( One or two or more arbitrary hydrogen atoms of the phenyl group may be each independently substituted with a halogen atom, a methyl group, a methoxy group, a trifluoromethyl group, or a trifluoromethoxy group.), A methyl group , A methoxy group, a trifluoromethyl group, or a trifluoromethoxy group is preferred.
- X 101 and X 102 in the general formulas (Ra), (Rb), (Rc), (Rf), (Rg), and (Rh) are each independently a phenyl group (1 of the phenyl group).
- the hydrogen atom or two or more arbitrary hydrogen atoms are each independently preferably substituted with a halogen atom, a methyl group, a methoxy group, a trifluoromethyl group, or a trifluoromethoxy group.
- the phenyl group is more preferable.
- X 101 in the general formula (Rk) is more preferably a halogen atom, a cyano group, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a trifluoromethyl group, or a trifluoromethoxy group, and a halogen atom, a methyl group, or a trifluoromethyl group. Or a trifluoromethoxy group is more preferable.
- Q is a divalent hydrocarbon group.
- the divalent hydrocarbon group may be linear, branched, or a group having a cyclic structure.
- the number of carbon atoms of the divalent hydrocarbon group is preferably 1 to 16, more preferably 1 to 10, and further preferably 1 to 6.
- the divalent hydrocarbon group is preferably a group that single-bonds with two oxygen atoms in the general formulas (Re) and (Rj) at one carbon atom.
- two carbon atoms marked with an asterisk, two oxygen atoms bonded to them, and one carbon atom in Q are each a 5-membered ring. Is forming.
- Specific examples include an unsubstituted methylene group, a cyclopropylidene group, a cyclobutylidene group, a cyclopentylidene group, a cyclohexylidene group, or the like, in which one or two hydrogen atoms are substituted by a hydrocarbon group. More preferred are a methylene group, an isopropylidene group, and a cyclohexylidene group.
- n 12 is an integer of 0 to 5
- X 101 is a phenyl group (any one or two or more arbitrary phenyl groups).
- Each hydrogen atom may be independently substituted with a halogen atom, a methyl group, a methoxy group, a trifluoromethyl group, or a trifluoromethoxy group, and R 103 is an unsubstituted carbon atom of 1
- a group that is a linear or branched alkyl group of ⁇ 6 is preferred, n 12 is an integer of 0 to 5, X 101 is an unsubstituted phenyl group, and R 103 is the number of unsubstituted carbon atoms More preferred is a group which is a 1-6 linear or branched alkyl group.
- n 12 is an integer of 0 to 5
- n 13 is 0 or 1
- X 103 is a halogen atom, a methyl group, or A group which is a trifluoromethyl group and R 103 is an unsubstituted linear alkyl group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms is preferred.
- R 100 or R 101 of the compound represented by the general formula (Ch-I) in particular, the following formulas (Ra-1) to (Ra-3) or the general formulas (Rf-1) to (Rf-3) The group represented by these is preferable.
- R 100 or R 101 is such a group, the left end is bonded to A 100 (or D, Z 101 ) or A 101 (or D, Z 100 ), respectively.
- An asterisk represents a chiral carbon atom.
- n 13 represents 0 or 1.
- n represents an integer of 2 to 12.
- n is preferably an integer of 3 to 8, and more preferably 4, 5 or 6.
- the groups represented by formulas (R-1) to (R-14) and (R-16) are at the right end, and the group represented by formula (R-15) is at the left end with A 100 (or D, Z 101 ) or A 101 (or D, Z 100 ), respectively.
- These polymerizable groups are cured by radical polymerization, radical addition polymerization, cationic polymerization, or anionic polymerization.
- the formula (R-1), formula (R-2), formula (R-4), formula (R-5), formula (R-7), formula (R ⁇ 11), the formula (R-13), the formula (R-15) or the group represented by the formula (R-16) are preferable, and the formula (R-1), the formula (R-2), the formula (R— 7), a group represented by formula (R-11), formula (R-13) or formula (R-16) is more preferred, and formula (R-1), formula (R-2) or formula (R— The group represented by 16) is more preferable.
- R 100 or R 101 in the general formula (Ch-I) is a chiral group including a ring structure
- the ring structure included in the group may be aromatic or aliphatic.
- the ring structure that the alkyl group can take include a monocyclic structure, a condensed ring structure, and a spirocyclic ring structure, and can include one or more heteroatoms.
- Z 100 and Z 101 are each independently —O—, —S—, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —O—COO—, —CO—N.
- -CO-N (R 105) - , or -N (R 105) -CO- R 105 medium represents a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, carbon atoms A linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable, and a linear alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is more preferable.
- m 11 is an integer of 2 or more and a plurality of Z 100 are present in one molecule, they may be the same or different.
- m 12 is an integer of 2 or more and a plurality of Z 101 are present in one molecule, they may be the same or different.
- a 100 and A 101 are each independently the following (a ′) group, (b ′) group, or (c ′) group.
- m 11 is an integer of 2 or more and a plurality of A 100 are present in one molecule, they may be the same or different.
- m 12 is an integer of 2 or more and a plurality of A 101 are present in one molecule, they may be the same or different.
- a ′ trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group (one methylene group present in the group or two or more methylene groups not adjacent to each other independently represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom; May be substituted).
- (B ′) 1,4-phenylene group (one —CH ⁇ present in this group or two or more non-adjacent —CH ⁇ may be substituted with a nitrogen atom).
- the (a ′) group, (b ′) group, and (c ′) group may all be unsubstituted, and one or more hydrogen atoms in the group are each independently A halogen atom, a cyano group, a nitro group, an alkyl group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms (one or two or more hydrogen atoms in the alkyl group are each independently substituted by a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom) Or an alkoxy group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms (one or two or more hydrogen atoms in the alkoxy group may each independently be substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom).
- alkylcarbonyl group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms one or more hydrogen atoms in the alkylcarbonyl group may each independently be substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom), or A with 1 to 7 carbon atoms
- Job aryloxycarbonyl group one or more hydrogen atoms in the alkoxycarbonyl group is, independently, a fluorine atom or chlorine atom may be substituted. It may be substituted by.
- the (a ′) group or the (b ′) group is preferable, and an unsubstituted trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group
- An unsubstituted 1,4-phenylene group, one or more hydrogen atoms are each independently a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a cyano group, an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
- n 11 represents 0 or 1.
- m 12 is 0 and m 11 is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
- n 11 and m 12 are 0, m 11 is preferably 1, 2, 3, or 4, and more preferably 1, 2, or 3.
- n 11 is 1, m 11 and m 12 are each independently 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, preferably 1, 2, 3, or 4, more preferably 1, 2 or 3.
- n 11 is 1, m 11 and m 12 may be different from each other, but are preferably the same.
- D is a divalent group represented by the above formulas (D1) to (D4). In the formulas (D1) to (D4), each of them is bound to Z 101 (or R 100 ) or Z 101 (or R 100 ) at the part marked with a black circle.
- any one or two or more arbitrary hydrogen atoms of the benzene ring are each independently a halogen atom (F, Cl, Br, I) may be substituted with an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or an alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
- a halogen atom F, Cl, Br, I
- alkyl group or alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms that serves as a substituent for the hydrogen atom in the benzene ring one or more hydrogen atoms in the group may be substituted with a fluorine atom.
- one or more methylene groups in the group are each independently —O—, —S—, —COO—, —OCO—, —CF 2 —, —CF ⁇ CH—, —CH.
- An oxygen atom or a sulfur atom may be substituted by ⁇ CF—, —CF ⁇ CF— or —C ⁇ C— so that they are not directly bonded to each other.
- examples of the compound n 11 is 0, the remaining partial structure excluding R 100 and R 101 at both ends of the compound represented by the following general formula (b1)
- a structure represented by (b13) is preferred.
- either one of both ends is bonded to R 100 and the other is bonded to R 101 .
- at least one of R 100 and R 101 is a chiral alkyl group.
- Z 102 is the same as Z 100 and Z 101 in the general formula (Ch-I).
- a 102 represents a 1,4-phenylene group (one —CH ⁇ present in the group or two or more —CH ⁇ not adjacent to each other)
- One or two or more arbitrary hydrogen atoms that may be substituted with a nitrogen atom and each independently represent a halogen atom, a methyl group, a methoxy group, a trifluoromethyl group, or a trimethyl group.
- a fluoromethoxy group By substituting —CH ⁇ or a hydrogen atom in the 1,4-phenylene group, it is possible to control the decrease in crystallinity and the direction and magnitude of dielectric anisotropy of a liquid crystal composition containing the compound.
- a compound in which the ring structure in A 102 is a heterocyclic ring such as a pyridine ring or a pyrimidine ring (that is, one —CH ⁇ present in a 1,4-phenylene group or not adjacent 2
- a compound that is a benzene ring rather than a compound in which more than one —CH ⁇ is a group substituted with a nitrogen atom that is, —CH ⁇ present in a 1,4-phenylene group is not substituted with a nitrogen atom
- the compound which is a group is preferred.
- a compound in which the ring structure in A 102 is a heterocyclic ring such as a pyridine ring or a pyrimidine ring is preferable to a compound in which the ring structure in A 102 is a benzene ring.
- a compound having a hydrocarbon ring such as a benzene ring or a cyclohexane ring has a relatively small polarizability, but a compound having a heterocyclic ring such as a pyridine ring or a pyrimidine ring has a relatively polarizability of the compound. It is large and preferable for decreasing the crystallinity and stabilizing the liquid crystallinity.
- the compounds having n 11 and m 12 of 0 are preferably the following general formulas (Ch-I-1) to (Ch-I-30).
- R 100, R 101 and Z 100 represents the same meaning as R 100, R 101 and Z 100 in the general formula (Ch-I)
- R 100 and R 101 each represents a chiral alkyl group
- L 100 to L 105 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom.
- R 100 and R 101 are represented by any one of the general formulas (Ra) to (Rk). And one or both of R 100 and R 101 are represented by the formulas (Ra-1) to (Ra-3) or the general formulas (Rf-1) to (Rf-3).
- the compound which is group is more preferable.
- the remaining one of R 100 and R 101 has 1 to 1 carbon atoms.
- achiral alkyl groups (one or more non-adjacent methylene groups in the alkyl group each independently represents —O—, —S—, —NH—, —N (CH 3 ) —, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —OCO—O—, —S—CO—, —CO—S—, —CH ⁇ CH—, —CF 2 —, —CF ⁇ CH—, Optionally substituted by —CH ⁇ CF—, —CF ⁇ CF— or C ⁇ C—, wherein one or more hydrogen atoms in the alkyl group are each independently a halogen atom or a cyano group Is preferably substituted by the number of carbon atoms.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material of the present invention preferably contains at least one compound represented by any one of the general formulas (Ch-I-1) to (Ch-I-30). More preferably, it contains a compound represented by Ch-I-30).
- Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (Ch-I-30) include the following general formulas (Ch-I-30-1) to (Ch-I-30-6) (wherein n 13 Represents 0 or 1, n represents an integer of 2 to 12, R 102 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 16 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 16 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 16 carbon atoms, or A alkenyloxy group having 2 to 16 carbon atoms, and L 100 to L 105 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom.
- R 102 represents an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or 2 carbon atoms.
- An alkenyl group having 6 to 6 carbon atoms or an alkenyloxy group having 2 to 6 carbon atoms is preferable.
- the compound represented by the general formula (Ch-I) has a structure having an asymmetric carbon in the ring structure portion.
- a compound in which D is the formula (D2) or (D4) is preferable, and a compound in which D is the formula (D4) is more preferable.
- D is the formula (D2)
- compounds represented by the following general formulas (K2-1) to (K2-8) are preferable.
- the compound in which D is the formula (D4) the following general formula ( Compounds represented by K3-1) to (K3-6) are preferred.
- the asterisk (*) represents a chiral carbon atom.
- R K is independently the same as R 100 and R 101 in formula (Ch-I). Represents meaning.
- R K Each independently represents a chiral or achiral alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms (one or more non-adjacent methylene groups in the alkyl group are each independently —O—, —S—, —NH—, —N (CH 3 ) —, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —OCO—O—, —S—CO—, —CO—S—, —CH ⁇ CH
- One or more hydrogens in the alkyl group optionally substituted by —, —CF 2 —, —CF ⁇ CH—, —CH ⁇ CF
- the compound is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 16 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 16 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 2 to 16 carbon atoms, or an alkenyloxy group having 2 to 16 carbon atoms. More preferably, the compound is an alkyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, or an alkenyloxy group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms.
- the axially asymmetric compound is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (IV-1), (IV-2), (IV-3) or (IV-4).
- the bond connecting the ⁇ -positions of two naphthalene rings is an axially asymmetric axis.
- R 71 and R 72 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an isocyanate group, an isothiocyanate group, or 1 carbon atom.
- Arbitrary one or two or more methylene groups in the alkyl group independently represent —O—, —S—, —COO—, —, as oxygen atoms and sulfur atoms are not directly bonded to each other. It may be substituted with OCO—, —CH ⁇ CH—, —CF ⁇ CF—, or —C ⁇ C—.
- any one or two or more hydrogen atoms in the alkyl group may be substituted with a halogen atom.
- R 71 and R 72 are each independently an unsubstituted or optionally substituted carbon atom number. It is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and further preferably an unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
- a 71 and A 72 are each independently an aromatic or non-aromatic 3, 6 to 8 membered ring, or 9 carbon atoms
- the above condensed ring is represented. Any one or more hydrogen atoms in these ring structures are each independently substituted with a halogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, or a haloalkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. It may be.
- any one or two or more methylene groups not adjacent to each other in the ring structure may each independently be substituted with —O—, —S—, or —NH—, Any one of the ring structures or two or more —CH ⁇ that are not adjacent to each other may be substituted with —N ⁇ .
- m 71 is 2 or more and a plurality of A 71 are present in one molecule, they may be the same as or different from each other.
- m 72 is 2 or more and a plurality of A 72 are present in one molecule, they may be the same as or different from each other.
- a 71 and A 72 are each independently 1,4-phenylene group, trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group, Pyridine-2,5-diyl group, pyrimidine-2,5-diyl group and naphthalene-2,6-diyl group are preferred.
- 1,4-phenylene group in which one or two or more hydrogen atoms may be substituted with fluorine atoms, or trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group is more preferable, and unsubstituted 1,4-phenylene.
- a group or an unsubstituted trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group is more preferable.
- Z 71 and Z 72 each independently represent a single bond or an alkylene group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
- Arbitrary one or two or more methylene groups in the alkylene group independently represent —O—, —S—, —COO—, —, as oxygen atoms and sulfur atoms are not directly bonded to each other.
- any one or two or more hydrogen atoms in the alkylene group may be substituted with a halogen atom.
- m 71 is 2 or more and a plurality of Z 71 are present in one molecule, they may be the same as or different from each other.
- m 72 is 2 or more and a plurality of Z 72 are present in one molecule, they may be the same as or different from each other.
- Z 71 and Z 72 are each independently a single bond, an unsubstituted alkylene group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, —COO —, —OCO—, —CH ⁇ CH—, or —C ⁇ C— are preferred, and a single bond, —CH 2 —, —CH 2 CH 2 —, —COO—, —OCO—, —CH ⁇ CH—, Alternatively, —C ⁇ C— is more preferable, and a single bond, —COO—, or —OCO— is more preferable.
- X 71 and X 72 are each independently a single bond, —COO—, —OCO—, —CH 2 O—, —OCH 2 —, — CF 2 O—, —OCF 2 —, or —CH 2 CH 2 — is represented.
- X 71 and X 72 are each independently a single bond, —COO—, —OCO—, —CH 2 O—, —OCH 2 — or —CH 2 CH 2 — is preferable, and a single bond, —COO—, or —OCO— is more preferable.
- R 73 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, or —X 71 — (A 71 —Z 71 ) m 71 —R 71 .
- m 71 and m 72 each independently represents an integer of 1 to 4.
- R 73 is —X 71 — (A 71 —Z 71 ) m 71 —R 71
- either one of the two m 71 is 0. Good.
- m 71 and m 72 are each independently preferably 2 or 3, and more preferably 2.
- a single bond connecting two benzene rings is an axially asymmetric axis.
- two naphthalenes The bond connecting the ⁇ -positions of the ring is the axis of axial asymmetry.
- R 61 and R 62 are each independently any one or two or more hydrogen atoms are each independently substituted with an alkyl group, an alkoxyl group, or a halogen atom.
- the alkyl group or alkoxyl group substituted with a hydrogen atom in the phenyl group is preferably a linear or branched chain having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and a linear or branched chain having 1 to 3 carbon atoms. More preferably.
- R 63 , R 64 , R 65 , R 66 , R 67 and R 68 are each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxyl group, an acyloxy group, a halogen atom or a haloalkyl group. Or a dialkylamino group.
- R 63 , R 64 and R 65 in the general formula (IV-3) are an optionally substituted methylene chain, or an optionally substituted mono or polymethylene diene May form an oxy group, and two of R 66 , R 67 and R 68 may have a methylene chain which may have a substituent, or mono or polymethylene which may have a substituent A dioxy group may be formed. However, it excludes when both R65 and R66 are hydrogen atoms.
- X 61 and Y 61 , X 62 and Y 62 are present, and X 61 , X 62 , Y 61 , and Y 62 are each independently CH 2 , C ⁇ O, O, N, S, P, B, or Si is represented.
- X 61 , X 62 , Y 61 , or Y 62 is N, P, B, or Si, bonded to a substituent such as an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an acyl group so as to satisfy the required valence You may do it.
- E 61 and E 62 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an allyl group, a benzyl group, an alkenyl group, an alkynyl group, an alkyl ether group, an alkyl ester group, an alkyl group. It represents either a ketone group, a heterocyclic group or a derivative thereof.
- a compound represented by the general formula (IV-1) or (IV-2) is particularly preferable when a strong helical induction force is required.
- the compound represented by the general formula (IV-1) specifically, compounds represented by the following general formulas (K4-1) to (K4-12) are preferable, and the general formula (K4-1) To (K4-6) are more preferred, and compounds represented by the general formulas (K4-3) to (K4-6) are more preferred.
- the bond connecting the ⁇ -positions of the two naphthalene rings is an axially asymmetric axis.
- R 71 and R 72 represent the same meaning as R 71 and R 72 in the general formula (IV-1).
- R 71 and R 72 are each independently unsubstituted or substituted.
- a compound that is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, a compound that is an unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a compound having 1 to 6 carbon atoms is more preferable. More preferred are compounds that are unsubstituted alkyl groups.
- the bond connecting the ⁇ -positions of the two naphthalene rings is an axially asymmetric axis.
- R 71 represents the same meaning as R 71 in formula (IV-2).
- R 71 is any one or two or more hydrogen atoms.
- the compound which is an optionally substituted alkyl group having 1 to 19 carbon atoms is preferred, the compound which is an unsubstituted alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms is more preferred, and an unsubstituted alkyl having 1 to 6 carbon atoms Base More preferred are compounds.
- Examples of the compound having surface asymmetry include a helicene derivative represented by the following general formula (IV-5).
- a helicene derivative represented by the following general formula (IV-5).
- the front-rear relations of the overlapping rings cannot be freely changed, so that the case where the ring takes a right-handed spiral structure is distinguished from the case where it takes a left-handed helical structure, and the chirality is To express.
- X 51 and Y 51 , X 52 and Y 52 are present, and X 51 , X 52 , Y 51 , and Y 52 are each independently CH 2 , C ⁇ O, O, N, S, P, B, or Si is represented.
- X 51 , X 52 , Y 51 , and Y 52 are N, P, B, and Si, they are bonded to a substituent such as an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or an acyl group so as to satisfy a required valence. May be.
- E 51 and E 52 are each independently a hydrogen atom, alkyl group, aryl group, allyl group, benzyl group, alkenyl group, alkynyl group, alkyl ether group, alkyl ester group, alkyl It represents either a ketone group, a heterocyclic group or a derivative thereof.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material of the present invention may contain only one kind of chiral compound, but it is preferable to use two or more kinds in combination. By combining a plurality of types of chiral compounds having different structures and physical properties, a chiral liquid crystal-containing material having desired physical properties can be easily obtained.
- the chiral compound used in the chiral liquid crystal-containing material of the present invention those having a relatively large helical induction force are preferable.
- a compound having a large helical induction force has a desired pitch (for example, a pitch of 0.01 to 1 ⁇ m, preferably 0.05 to 0.5 ⁇ m at 25 ° C.) in the helical structure of the nematic liquid crystal composition to which the chiral compound is added. More preferably, the amount of addition required for 0.1 to 0.4 ⁇ m can be reduced.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material of the present invention more easily develops an optically isotropic phase such as a blue phase, the temperature dependence of the helical induction force when added to the liquid crystal composition is negative (that is, as the temperature increases) It is preferable to use at least one kind of chiral compound that increases the helical induction force.
- a chiral liquid crystal capable of exhibiting a blue phase III that does not coexist with any of the blue phase I, blue phase II, or liquid phase in a very wide temperature range (for example, a temperature range of 2 ° C. or more).
- one or more kinds of chiral compounds in which the temperature dependence of the helical induction force is positive and one or more kinds of chiral compounds in which the temperature dependence of the helical induction force is negative It is more preferable to use in combination with a compound.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material of the present invention includes, as chiral compounds, compounds represented by the general formulas (Ch-I-1) to (Ch-I-30) and the general formulas (K2-1) to (K2-8). ), Compounds represented by general formulas (K3-1) to (K3-6), compounds represented by (K4-1) to (K4-12), and compounds represented by general formula (K5) -1) to (K5-3) are preferably included, and at least one selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by (K5-3) is preferably included, and more preferably two or more selected from these compounds are combined.
- the compound group further includes a combination of at least one chiral compound having a positive temperature dependency of the helical induction force and at least one chiral compound having a negative temperature dependency of the helical induction force.
- the content of the chiral compound in the chiral liquid crystal-containing material of the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is an amount sufficient to allow the pitch of the nematic liquid crystal composition to be used to be within a desired range. It is appropriately adjusted in consideration of the type of liquid crystal composition, the type of chiral compound (particularly polarizability), the combination thereof, and the like.
- the content of the chiral compound in the liquid crystal / polymer composite material of the present invention can be, for example, 1 to 45 parts by mass, preferably 3 to 30 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the nematic liquid crystal composition.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material of the present invention is preferably a liquid crystal / polymer composite material containing a polymer obtained by polymerizing at least one polymerizable compound in addition to the nematic liquid crystal composition and the chiral compound.
- a liquid crystal composition exhibiting an optically isotropic phase obtained by adding a chiral compound to the nematic liquid crystal composition is obtained, and by adding a polymer to the liquid crystal composition and stabilizing the optical composition, etc.
- An isotropic phase, particularly a blue phase can be expressed in a wider temperature range.
- the liquid crystal / polymer composite material of the present invention may be prepared by mixing the nematic liquid crystal composition, the chiral compound, and the polymer.
- the nematic liquid crystal composition, the chiral compound, and the polymerizable compound are used. It is preferable to prepare a polymerizable compound-containing liquid crystal composition mixed with a compound and then polymerize the compound having a polymerizable group in the polymerizable compound-containing liquid crystal composition.
- the polymerizable compound used for forming the polymer may be one type or two or more types.
- the polymerizable compound is a compound having at least one polymerizable group in the molecule.
- the polymerizable group is preferably a group having a structure represented by the above formulas (R-1) to (R-16).
- the polymerizable compound used for forming the polymer may be a photopolymerizable compound or a heat polymerizable compound.
- a polymerizable compound that can be polymerized by a photopolymerization reaction is preferable because the polymerization reaction can be performed relatively easily.
- the polymerizable compound has a polymerizable compound (mesogenic (liquid crystalline) polymerizable compound) having a ring structure (mesogenic group) such as a cyclohexane skeleton or a benzene skeleton, and a polymerizable compound having no mesogenic group (non-volatile). Mesogenic (non-liquid crystalline) polymerizable compounds).
- ⁇ Mesogenic polymerizable compound As the mesogenic polymerizable compound, a compound represented by the following general formula (PC1) is preferable.
- P 1 represents a polymerizable group.
- P 1 is preferably a group having a structure represented by the above formulas (R-1) to (R-16).
- Sp 1 represents a spacer group having 0 to 20 carbon atoms.
- the spacer group is a divalent group and is not particularly limited as long as it has 0 to 20 carbon atoms, and may be a group containing atoms other than carbon atoms. Further, it may be linear, branched, or have a ring structure.
- the spacer group examples include a single bond, an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkenylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an arylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
- the alkylene group or alkenylene group one or two or more non-adjacent methylene groups are independently defined as those in which an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom are not directly bonded to each other, —O—, —S—, It may be substituted by —NH—, —N (CH 3 ) —, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —OCOO—, —SCO—, —COS— or —C ⁇ C—.
- one or two or more hydrogen atoms in the alkylene group or alkenylene group may be each independently substituted with a halogen atom or a cyano group.
- Sp 1 is a single bond, an unsubstituted or substituted alkylene group having 1 to 16 carbon atoms, or an unsubstituted or substituted carbon atom.
- An alkenylene group having a number of 1 to 16 is preferable, and a single bond, an unsubstituted alkylene group, or a substituted alkenylene group is more preferable.
- Q 1 is a single bond, —O—, —OCH 2 —, —OCH 2 —, —C 2 H 4 —, —COO—, —OCO—, —CH ⁇ CH—, —OCOCH 2 —, —CH 2 OCO—, —COOCH 2 —, —CH 2 COO—, —CH ⁇ CH—COO—, —OCO—CH ⁇ CH—, —CH ⁇ CH—OCO—, —COO—CH ⁇ CH—, —COOC 2 H 4 —, —OCOC 2 H 4 —, —C 2 H 4 OCO—, —C 2 H 4 COO—, —C ⁇ C—, —CF 2 O— and —OCF 2 — is preferable.
- —O—, —OCH 2 —, —CH 2 O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —C 2 H 4 —, — C ⁇ C— and a single bond are more preferable, —OCH 2 —, —CH 2 O—, —COO—, -OCO- and a single bond are particularly preferred.
- R 3 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkyl group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms (one or two or more methylene groups in the alkyl group have an oxygen atom
- R 3 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, or an alkyl group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms (one or two or more methylene groups in the alkyl group have an oxygen atom
- Each independently of —O—, —S—, —NH—, —N (CH 3 ) —, —CO—, —COO—, —OCO—, —OCOO—, —SCO -, -COS- or -C ⁇ C- may be substituted), or P 2 -Sp 2 -Q 2- (wherein P 2 , Sp 2 and Q 2 are P 1 , Sp 1 represents the same meaning as Q 1 ).
- n 1 and n 2 each independently represent 1, 2 or 3.
- the compound represented by the general formula (PC1) is a monofunctional polymerizable compound.
- the compound represented by the general formula (PC1) is a polyfunctional polymerization having two or more polymerizable groups. It is a sex compound.
- MG represents a mesogenic group.
- the mesogenic group is a functional group having rigidity for exhibiting liquid crystallinity, and generally has a ring structure such as a cyclohexane skeleton or a benzene skeleton.
- the mesogenic group may be any group constituting a mesogenic moiety of a known liquid crystal molecule, but is preferably a group represented by the following general formula (MG-1).
- C 1 and C 3 are each independently 1,4-phenylene group, 1,3,4-benzenetriyl group, 1,2,4-benzenetriyl group, benzene -1,2,4,5-tetrayl group, benzene-1,2,3,4-tetrayl group, 1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,3,4-cyclohexanetriyl group, 1,2,4- Cyclohexanetriyl group, cyclohexane-1,2,3,4-tetrayl group, 1,4-cyclohexenyl group, tetrahydropyran-2,5-diyl group, 1,3-dioxane-2,5-diyl group, tetrahydro Thiopyran-2,5-diyl group, 1,4-bicyclo (2,2,2) octylene group, 2,6-naphthylene group, naphthalene-2,5,6-triyl
- One or more arbitrary hydrogen atoms in these groups are each independently a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a trifluoromethyl group, a trifluoromethoxy group, a cyano group, or an alkyl having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
- the alkenyloxy group may be substituted with an alkenoyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms or an alkenoyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms.
- C 2 represents 1,4-phenylene group, 1,4-cyclohexylene group, 1,4-cyclohexenyl group, tetrahydropyran-2,5-diyl group, 1,3- Dioxane-2,5-diyl group, tetrahydrothiopyran-2,5-diyl group, 1,4-bicyclo (2,2,2) octylene group, decahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, pyridine-2, 5-diyl group, pyrimidine-2,5-diyl group, pyrazine-2,5-diyl group, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydronaphthalene-2,6-diyl group, 2,6-naphthylene group, phenanthrene- 2,7-diyl group, 9,10-dihydrophenanthrene-2,7-diyl group, 1,2,3,4,4a, 9,
- One or more arbitrary hydrogen atoms in these groups are each independently a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a trifluoromethyl group, a trifluoromethoxy group, a cyano group, or an alkyl having 1 to 8 carbon atoms.
- the alkenyloxy group may be substituted with an alkenoyl group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms or an alkenoyloxy group having 2 to 8 carbon atoms. When there are a plurality of C 2 in one molecule, they may be the same or different.
- Y 1 and Y 2 are each independently a single bond, —O—, —OCH 2 —, —OCH 2 —, —C 2 H 4 —, —COO—, —OCO. —, —CH ⁇ CH—, —CO—, —OCOO—, —NH—, —NHCOO—, —OCONH—, —OCOCH 2 —, —CH 2 OCO—, —COOCH 2 —, —CH 2 COO—, —CH ⁇ CH—COO—, —OCO—CH ⁇ CH—, —CH ⁇ CH—OCO—, —COO—CH ⁇ CH—, —CH ⁇ CCH 3 —COO—, —COO—CCH 3 ⁇ CH—, —COOC 2 H 4 —, —OCOC 2 H 4 —, —C 2 H 4 OCO—, —C 2 H 4 COO—, —C ⁇ C—, —CF 2 O
- n 5 represents an integer of 0 to 5.
- n 5 is preferably an integer of 0 to 3, more preferably an integer of 0 to 2, and further preferably 0 or 1.
- the monofunctional polymerizable compound is preferably a compound represented by the following general formula (Va).
- R 31 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
- n 31 represents an integer of 0 or 1.
- T 1 , T 2 and T 3 are each independently a divalent group having the following 14 types of ring structures (where m represents an integer of 1 to 4). )
- Y 3 , Y 4 and Y 5 are each independently a single bond, —O—, —OCH 2 —, —OCH 2 —, —C 2 H 4 —, —COO—.
- Y 6 represents a single bond, —O—, —COO—, or —OCO—.
- R 32 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a cyano group, an alkoxy group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
- the hydrocarbon group is not particularly limited as long as it is a monovalent group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms and comprising a carbon atom and a hydrogen atom.
- An alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, carbon Examples thereof include an alkenyl group having 1 to 20 atoms and an alkynyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
- polyfunctional polymerizable compounds include compounds represented by the following general formula (PC1-1) (wherein P 1 , P 2 , Sp 1 , Sp 2 , Q 1 , Q 2 , MG, n 1 and n 2 represent the same meaning as in the general formula (PC1). More specifically, examples of the compound represented by the general formula (PC1-1) include compounds represented by the following general formulas (PC1-1) to (PC1-13).
- P 1 , P 2 , Sp 1 , Sp 2 , Q 1 and Q 2 represent the same meaning as in the general formula (PC1).
- Sp 1 , Sp 2 , Q 1 and Q 2 are preferably single bonds.
- P 1 and P 2 are each independently preferably the formula (R-1) or (R-2).
- each W 1 independently represents a fluorine atom, a trifluoromethyl group, a trifluoromethoxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or 1 carbon atom.
- W 2 Represents an alkoxy group of ⁇ 5, an alkenyl group of 2 to 5 carbon atoms, a phenyl group, —COOW 2 , —OCOW 2 or —OCOW 2 .
- -COOW 2, -OCOW 2, in -OCOOW 2 W 2 are each independently a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or straight-chain having 2 to 5 carbon atoms Alternatively, it represents a branched alkenyl group. When there are a plurality of W 1 in one molecule, they may be the same or different.
- each W 1 is independently a fluorine atom, a trifluoromethyl group, a trifluoromethoxy group, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or a phenyl group.
- a fluorine atom, a trifluoromethyl group, a trifluoromethoxy group, a methyl group, or a methoxy group is more preferable.
- n 3 independently represents 1, 2 or 3
- n 4 independently represents 1, 2 or 3
- n 6 independently represents Represents 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4
- n 3 + n 6 and n 4 + n 6 on the same ring are 5 or less.
- n 3 + n 4 is 2-4, 2 or 3 is more preferable.
- P 1 and P 2 are each independently the above formula (R-1) or (R-2), and W 1 is each independently a fluorine atom, a trifluoromethyl group, a trifluoromethoxy group, or a methyl group.
- W 1 is each independently a fluorine atom, a trifluoromethyl group, a trifluoromethoxy group, or a methyl group.
- n 3 + n 4 is 2 or 3.
- examples of the compound represented by the general formula (PC1-3) include compounds represented by the following formulas (PC1-3a) to (PC1-3i).
- a compound in which one or two or more hydrogen atoms on the benzene ring in formulas (PC1-3a) to (PC1-3i) are substituted with fluorine atoms may be used.
- the polymer contained in the liquid crystal / polymer composite material of the present invention is obtained by polymerizing one or more of these compounds as a polymerizable raw material and, if necessary, other polymerizable compounds. It is preferable.
- m 31 represents 0 or 1
- Y 11 and Y 12 each independently represent a single bond, —O—, —COO— or —OCO—
- Y 13 and Y 14 Each independently represents a single bond, —COO—, —OCO—, —CH ⁇ CH—COO—, —OCO—CH ⁇ CH—, —CH ⁇ CH—OCO—, —COO—CH ⁇ CH—, —COOC.
- 2 H 4 —, —OCOC 2 H 4 —, —C 2 H 4 OCO—, or —C 2 H 4 COO— is represented, and r and s each independently represent an integer of 2 to 14.
- the 1,4-phenylene group present in the general formula (Vb) may be unsubstituted, and one or two or more hydrogen atoms are each independently a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, or a methyl group. , A trifluoromethyl group, a trifluoromethoxy group, or a phenyl group.
- the compound represented by the general formula (Vb) compounds represented by the following general formulas (Vb1) to (Vb20) are particularly preferable.
- t and u each independently represents an integer of 2 to 14.
- the polymer contained in the liquid crystal / polymer composite material of the present invention is obtained by polymerizing one or more of these compounds as a polymerizable raw material and, if necessary, other polymerizable compounds. It is preferable.
- Non-mesogenic polymerizable compound a compound represented by the following general formula (PC2) is preferable.
- P represents a polymerizable group.
- P is preferably a group having a structure represented by the above formulas (R-1) to (R-16).
- P is a compound represented by the formula (R-1), the formula (R-2), the formula (R-4), the formula (R-5), or the formula (R-7).
- a group represented by the formula (R-11), the formula (R-13), the formula (R-15) or the formula (R-16) is preferable, and the formula (R-1), the formula (R-2), A group represented by the formula (R-7), the formula (R-11), the formula (R-13) or the formula (R-16) is more preferable, and the formula (R-1), the formula (R-2) or A group represented by formula (R-16) is more preferable.
- a 31 represents a single bond or an alkylene group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms.
- One or two or more methylene groups present in the alkylene group are each independently —O—, —CO—, —COO— or —OCO— as those in which oxygen atoms are not directly bonded to each other. May be substituted.
- One or two or more hydrogen atoms present in the alkylene group may each independently be substituted with a fluorine atom, a methyl group or an ethyl group.
- a 32 and A 34 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 18 carbon atoms.
- One or more methylene groups present in the alkyl group are each independently —O—, —CO—, —COO—, or —OCO—, assuming that the oxygen atoms are not directly bonded to each other. May be substituted.
- One or more hydrogen atoms present in the alkyl group may each independently be substituted with a halogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 17 carbon atoms.
- a 33 and A 35 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
- One or more methylene groups present in the alkyl group are each independently —O—, —CO—, —COO—, or —OCO—, assuming that the oxygen atoms are not directly bonded to each other. May be substituted.
- one or more hydrogen atoms present in the alkyl group may each independently be substituted with a halogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 9 carbon atoms.
- v represents an integer of 1 to 40.
- B 1 , B 2 and B 3 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or —A 36 —P (formula A 36 represents a single bond or an alkylene group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and P represents a polymerizable group.
- B 1 , B 2 or B 3 represents an alkyl group, one or two or more methylene groups present in the alkyl group are each independently regarded as those in which oxygen atoms are not directly bonded to each other, It may be substituted with O—, —CO—, —COO— or —OCO—.
- B 1 , B 2 or B 3 is a group represented by —A 36 —P, and the A 36 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, one or two present in the alkylene group
- One or more methylene groups may be independently substituted with —O—, —CO—, —COO—, or —OCO— as those in which oxygen atoms are not directly bonded to each other.
- One or two or more hydrogen atoms present in the alkylene group may each independently be substituted with a fluorine atom, a methyl group or an ethyl group.
- 0 to 3 groups represented by -A 36 -P are present.
- a plurality of P are present in one molecule, they may be the same as or different from each other.
- the polymerizable compound that is a raw material for the polymer contained in the liquid crystal / polymer composite material of the present invention it is preferable to use one or more compounds represented by the general formula (PC2).
- PC2 general formula
- a plurality of compounds having different main chain lengths or alkyl side chain lengths may be used.
- Specific examples of the compound represented by the general formula (PC2) include compounds represented by the following general formulas (PC2-a) to (PC2-h).
- the polymerizable compound that is a raw material for the polymer contained in the liquid crystal / polymer composite material of the present invention is one kind selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by the general formulas (PC2-a) to (PC2-h) It is preferable to use the above, and it is more preferable to use at least one compound selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by the general formulas (PC2-a) to (PC2-d).
- P represents a polymerizable group
- B 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group.
- P is preferably a group having a structure represented by the above formulas (R-1) to (R-16).
- R-1 the formula (R-2) or the formula (R-16)
- the group represented by the formula (R-1) is more preferable because the group represented by the formula (R-1) is high.
- two Ps contained in one molecule may be the same as each other. Well, it can be different.
- a 37 and A 42 each independently represents a single bond or an alkylene group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms.
- One or two or more methylene groups present in the alkylene group are each independently —O—, —CO—, —COO— or —OCO— as those in which oxygen atoms are not directly bonded to each other. May be substituted.
- One or two or more hydrogen atoms present in the alkylene group may each independently be substituted with a fluorine atom, a methyl group or an ethyl group.
- a 38 and A 41 each independently represents a linear alkyl group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms.
- One or more methylene groups present in the alkyl group are each independently —O—, —CO—, —COO—, or —OCO—, assuming that the oxygen atoms are not directly bonded to each other. May be substituted.
- a 39 and A 42 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
- One or more methylene groups present in the alkyl group are each independently —O—, —CO—, —COO—, or —OCO—, assuming that the oxygen atoms are not directly bonded to each other. May be substituted. Further, one or more hydrogen atoms present in the alkyl group may each independently be substituted with a halogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 9 carbon atoms.
- a 40 represents an alkylene group having 9 to 16 carbon atoms.
- any one hydrogen atom in the methylene group is a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
- one or two or more methylene groups present in the alkylene group are each independently an oxygen atom that is not directly bonded to each other as —O—, —CO—, —COO—, or —OCO. It may be substituted with-.
- the distance between the two polymerizable groups is independently the number of carbon atoms in A 37 , A 40 and A 43 . Can be adjusted by changing the length.
- One of the characteristics of the compound represented by the general formula (PC2-a) is that the distance between the polymerizable groups is long. However, if the distance is too long, the polymerization rate becomes extremely slow, which may adversely affect the phase separation, so there is an upper limit for the distance between polymerizable groups.
- the distance between the two side chains of A 38 and A 41 also affects the mobility of the main chain.
- the distance between A 38 and A 41 is short, the side chains A 38 and A 41 come to interfere with each other, resulting in a decrease in the mobility of the entire compound. Therefore, when the distance between the polymerizable groups is about the same, it is more preferable that the number of carbon atoms of A 40 is longer than that of A 38 and A 41 having a longer number.
- a 40 represents the distance between the cross-linking points from the point of adjusting the distance between the side chains (distance of A 38 and A 41 , distance of A 39 and A 42 ). The longer one is preferable from the viewpoint of increasing the distance and lowering the glass transition temperature. However if A 40 is too long, the general formula (PC2-a) or (PC2-b) has too high a molecular weight compounds represented by the compatibility with the liquid crystal composition tends to decrease, and reasons that such adversely affect phase separation for the polymerization rate is too slow, the upper limit is set naturally on the length of a 40.
- a 40 represents an alkylene group having 9 to 16 carbon atoms (at least 1 to 5 carbon atoms present in the alkylene group).
- any one hydrogen atom in the methylene group is substituted with a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
- two or more methylene groups may be independently substituted with —O—, —CO—, —COO—, or —OCO—, assuming that oxygen atoms are not directly bonded to each other. It is preferable that
- a 40 has a structure in which a hydrogen atom in an alkylene group is substituted with an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms as a structural feature.
- the number of hydrogen atoms substituted with an alkyl group in one alkylene group is 1 or more and 5 or less, preferably 1 to 3, and more preferably 2 or 3.
- the alkyl group as a substituent preferably has 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
- the side chains A 38 , A 39 , A 41 and A 42 it is preferable that the length of these side chains has the following aspect.
- a 38 and A 39 are bonded to the same carbon atom of the main chain, but when these lengths are different, the longer side chain is It is referred to as a 38 (if of equal length to the length of a 39 of a 38, one to one and a 38).
- a 41 if the length and the length of A 42 of A 41 are different, if the length and the length of A 42 in the longer side chain of is referred to as A 41 (A 41 are equal, either the one and a 41).
- a 38 and A 41 are preferably each independently a linear alkyl group having 2 to 18 carbon atoms (in the alkyl group).
- One or more methylene groups present may be each independently substituted with —O—, —CO—, —COO— or —OCO—, assuming that the oxygen atoms are not directly bonded to each other.
- Each of which is not directly bonded to each other may be independently substituted with —O—, —CO—, —COO— or —OCO—.
- the length of A 39 and A 42 is too long because spatial interference between side chains is induced.
- the short side chain inhibits the proximity of adjacent main chains, prevents interference between the main chains of the polymer, and main chain mobility. It is thought that it has the effect
- a 39 and A 42 are preferably each independently a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms (present in the alkyl group).
- One or two or more methylene groups may be independently substituted with —O—, —CO—, —COO— or —OCO— as those in which oxygen atoms are not directly bonded to each other.
- each independently represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms (one or two or more methylene groups present in the alkyl group have oxygen atoms directly to each other).
- each may be independently substituted with —O—, —CO—, —COO— or —OCO—, and more preferably each independently a hydrogen atom or carbon atom.
- Number 1-3 An alkyl group (one or two or more methylene groups present in the alkyl group independently represent —O—, —CO—, —COO— or —, as oxygen atoms are not directly bonded to each other; It may be substituted with OCO-).
- a represents an integer of 6 to 22.
- examples of the compound in which B 4 is a hydrogen atom include alkyl acrylates such as dodecyl acrylate.
- b and c each independently represent an integer of 1 to 10
- d represents an integer of 1 to 10
- e represents an integer of 0 to 6 .
- at least one of d and e is preferably an integer of 1 to 5, and more preferably an integer of 1 to 3.
- f, g, h and i each independently represents an integer of 1 to 10. From the viewpoint of suppressing spatial interference between the side chains, at least one of h and i is preferably an integer of 1 to 5, and more preferably an integer of 1 to 3.
- the compounds represented by the general formula (PC2) including the compounds represented by the general formulas (PC2-a) to (PC2-h), are appropriately combined with known organic synthesis reactions using known compounds as starting materials. Can be synthesized.
- a compound in which A39 and A42 are hydrogen atoms is a compound such as acrylic acid or methacrylic acid having a compound having a plurality of epoxy groups and active hydrogen capable of reacting with the epoxy group. It can be obtained by reacting with a functional compound to synthesize a polymerizable compound having a hydroxyl group and then reacting with a saturated fatty acid.
- a compound in which A 39 and A 42 in the general formula (PC2-a) are alkyl groups and A 37 and A 43 are methylene groups can react with, for example, a compound having a plurality of oxetane groups and an oxetane group.
- a method of reacting a fatty acid chloride or a fatty acid with a polymerizable compound having active hydrogen such as acrylic acid, or a compound having one oxetane group and a polyvalent fatty acid chloride capable of reacting with an oxetane group It can be obtained by a method of reacting a product or a fatty acid with a polymerizable compound having active hydrogen such as acrylic acid.
- a compound in which A 37 and A 43 in the general formula (PC2-a) are an alkylene group having 3 carbon atoms is, for example, a furan group instead of an oxetane group.
- a compound in which A 37 and A 43 in the general formula (PC2-a) are an alkylene group having 4 carbon atoms may be substituted with, for example, an oxetane group.
- the polymerizable compound that is a raw material for the polymer contained in the liquid crystal / polymer composite material of the present invention is preferably an achiral compound or a substantially racemic compound, but a chiral polymerizable compound may be used.
- a chiral polymerizable compound for example, a polymerizable compound represented by the following general formula (VI-a) or (VI-b) can be used.
- P represents a polymerizable group.
- P is preferably a group having a structure represented by the above formulas (R-1) to (R-16).
- R-1 the formula (R-2) or the formula (R-16)
- Group represented by the formula (R-1) or the formula (R-2) is more preferred, and a group represented by the formula (R-1) is more preferred because the polymerization rate is high. .
- n 21 represents an integer of 0 or 1.
- n 22 represents an integer of 0, 1 or 2.
- T 21 , T 22 , T 23 and T 24 are each independently a divalent group having a 6-membered ring structure (6-membered cyclic divalent). Group). Examples of the 6-membered cyclic divalent group include the following 12 types of 6-membered cyclic divalent groups.
- m represents an integer of 1 to 4.
- T 21 , T 22 , T 23 , and T 24 are each independently the above 12 kinds of 6-membered cyclic divalent groups. And a 1,4-phenylene group or a trans-1,4-cyclohexylene group is more preferable.
- T 25 represents a trivalent group having a 6-membered ring structure (6-membered cyclic trivalent group).
- 6-membered cyclic trivalent group examples include benzene-1,2,4-triyl group, benzene-1,3,4-triyl group, benzene-1,3,5-triyl group, cyclohexane-1,2, Examples include 4-triyl group, cyclohexane-1,3,4-triyl group, and cyclohexane-1,3,5-triyl group.
- Y 22 , Y 23 , and Y 25 are each independently a single bond or a linear or branched group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
- One methylene group or two non-adjacent methylene groups present in the alkylene group are each independently represented by —O—, —S— as those in which an oxygen atom and a sulfur atom are not directly bonded to each other.
- —CO—O— or —O—CO— may be substituted.
- one or two or more hydrogen atoms present in the alkylene group may be each independently substituted with a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom.
- the alkylene group may or may not contain an asymmetric carbon atom.
- the alkylene group include —CH 2 CH 2 —, —CH 2 O—, —OCH 2 —, —COO—, —OCO—, —C ⁇ C—, —CH ⁇ CH—, —CF ⁇ CF. —, — (CH 2 ) 4 —, —CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 O—, —OCH 2 CH 2 CH 2 —, —CH ⁇ CHCH 2 CH 2 —, or —CH 2 CH 2 CH ⁇ CH—. It is done.
- Y 21 and Y 24 each independently represent a single bond, —O—, —OCO—, or —COO—.
- Z 21 represents an alkylene group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms having an asymmetric carbon atom and including a branched chain structure.
- Z 22 represents an alkylene group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms. The alkylene group may or may not contain an asymmetric carbon atom.
- the raw material of the polymer contained in the liquid crystal / polymer composite material of the present invention at least one kind of polymerizable compound may be used, but the physical properties of the polymer (polymer) obtained after the polymerization reaction are within a desired range.
- the glass transition temperature of the polymer contained in the liquid crystal / polymer composite material of the present invention is preferably ⁇ 100 ° C. to 25 ° C. Therefore, it is preferable to appropriately adjust the type and composition of the polymerizable compound used as a raw material so that the glass transition temperature of the polymer after the polymerization reaction falls within the range. Furthermore, it is preferable to use at least one mesogenic polymerizable compound and at least one non-mesogenic polymerizable compound as a raw material for the polymer contained in the liquid crystal / polymer composite material of the present invention.
- the temperature range in which the liquid crystal / polymer composite material obtained by the polymerization reaction exhibits an optically isotropic phase can be further increased. Can be wide.
- the polymer raw material contained in the liquid crystal / polymer composite material of the present invention includes at least one polyfunctional mesogenic polymerizable compound and And at least one monofunctional or polyfunctional non-mesogenic polymerizable compound, and the compounds represented by the formulas (PC1-3a) to (PC1-3i) and the general formula (Vb1) ) To (Vb20) selected from the group consisting of at least one compound selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by the general formulas (PC2-a) to (PC2-h) It is more preferable that the compound includes at least one compound selected from the formulas (PC1-3a) to (PC1-3i) and the general formulas (Vb1) to (Vb20). of that One or more compounds selected from the group consisting of compounds and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of compounds represented by the general formulas (PC2-a) to (PC2-d) Is more preferable.
- liquid crystal / polymer composite material for example, a polymerizable compound-containing liquid crystal composition prepared by mixing a nematic liquid crystal composition, all chiral compounds, and all polymerizable compounds used as polymer raw materials was prepared. Then, it can manufacture by polymerizing the compound which has a polymeric group in the said polymeric compound containing liquid crystal composition.
- the order of mixing the nematic liquid crystal composition, the chiral compound and the polymerizable compound is not particularly limited, and all the raw materials may be mixed substantially simultaneously, and the nematic liquid crystal composition and the chiral compound are mixed in advance.
- the liquid crystal composition may be mixed with all polymerizable compounds used as a polymer raw material.
- the total amount of all polymerizable compounds in the polymerizable compound-containing liquid crystal composition can be appropriately determined in consideration of the type of polymerizable compound used, the type of nematic liquid crystal composition, the type of chiral compound, etc. 1 to 40% by mass is preferable, 1 to 40% by mass is more preferable, and 1 to 25% by mass is further preferable.
- the content of the mixture of the nematic liquid crystal composition and the chiral compound in the polymerizable compound-containing liquid crystal composition is preferably 60 to 95% by mass, more preferably 60 to 90% by mass, and 60 to 80%. More preferred is mass%.
- the said polymeric compound containing liquid crystal composition may contain the polymerization initiator as needed.
- a thermal polymerization initiator and a photopolymerization initiator can be added as a radical polymerization initiator.
- the following compounds are preferably used; Diethoxyacetophenone, 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-phenylpropan-1-one, benzyldimethyl ketal, 1- (4-isopropylphenyl) -2-hydroxy-2-methylpropan-1-one, 4- ( 2-hydroxyethoxy) phenyl- (2-hydroxy-2-propyl) ketone, 1-hydroxycyclohexyl-phenylketone, 2-methyl-2-morpholino (4-thiomethylphenyl) propan-1-one, 2-benzyl- Acetophenone series such as 2-dimethylamino-1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -butanone; Benzoins such as benzoin, benzoin isopropyl ether and benzoin isobutyl ether; Acylphosphine oxides such as 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyldiphenylphosphine oxide; Benzyl, methylphenylglyoxyesters; Benzophenone
- the polymerizable compound-containing liquid crystal composition may contain various additives widely used in the liquid crystal composition as long as the effects of the present invention are not impaired.
- stabilizers such as an antioxidant and an ultraviolet absorber can be added.
- examples of the stabilizer that can be used include hydroquinones, hydroquinone monoalkyl ethers, tert-butylcatechols, pyrogallols, thiophenols, nitro compounds, ⁇ -naphthylamines, ⁇ -naphthols, nitroso compounds, and the like. It is done.
- the amount added is preferably in the range of 0.005 to 1% by mass, more preferably 0.02 to 0.5% by mass, and 0.03 to 0.1% by mass with respect to the liquid crystal composition. % Is particularly preferred.
- the polymerizable compound-containing liquid crystal composition before the polymerization reaction is preferably capable of expressing an optically isotropic phase, more preferably capable of expressing a blue phase, and further capable of expressing blue phase III. preferable.
- the optically isotropic phase is stabilized by the polymer formed by the polymerization reaction.
- the liquid crystal / polymer composite material obtained by the polymerization reaction has an optically isotropic phase in a wider temperature range than the temperature range in which the liquid crystal composition before the polymerization reaction exhibits an optically isotropic phase. It can be expressed.
- the polymerization reaction of the polymerizable compound-containing liquid crystal composition is appropriately selected from known methods such as a method of irradiating active energy rays such as ultraviolet rays or an electron beam and a thermal polymerization method depending on the type of the polymerizable compound used. Selected.
- a method of irradiating active energy rays is preferable because the reaction proceeds at room temperature without requiring heating, and among them, a method of irradiating light such as ultraviolet rays is preferable because the operation is simple.
- a polarized light source or a non-polarized light source may be used.
- the polymerization reaction is preferably performed in a state where the polymerizable compound-containing liquid crystal composition retains an optically isotropic phase, particularly a blue phase.
- the polymerizable compound-containing liquid crystal composition expresses the blue phase III
- the polymerization reaction is started within the temperature range in which the polymerizable compound-containing liquid crystal composition exhibits the blue phase III, and the blue phase III is retained.
- the liquid crystal / polymer composite material produced by the polymerization reaction is completed within the temperature range showing the blue phase III, so that the temperature range showing the blue phase III is a polymerizable compound-containing liquid crystal composition before the polymerization reaction.
- a wider range of liquid crystal / polymer composites can be obtained.
- a nematic liquid crystal composition containing as a raw material a liquid crystalline compound containing more benzene skeletons than cyclohexane skeletons in the molecule.
- a nematic liquid crystal composition that is 50% by mass or more of the entire liquid crystal compound and a chiral compound in which the temperature dependence of the helical induction force is negative, and in the molecule relative to the entire nematic liquid crystal composition
- the content of the liquid crystal compound containing more benzene skeleton than the cyclohexane skeleton is 50% by mass or more, and the content of the liquid crystal compound having 1 or more cyclohexane skeletons in the molecule is more than the number of benzene skeletons.
- a nematic liquid crystal composition that is 50% by mass and a chiral compound in which the temperature dependence of the helical induction force is negative.
- the compound represented by the general formula (II) is contained in an amount of 10 to 50% by mass.
- a nematic liquid crystal composition containing 50 to 90% by mass of the compound represented by the general formula (III), and having a benzene skeleton in the molecule rather than a cyclohexane skeleton with respect to the entire liquid crystalline compound in the composition.
- any one of the blue phase I, the blue phase II, and the liquid phase is obtained by using a combination of a chiral compound in which the temperature dependence of the helical induction force is negative and a chiral compound in which the temperature dependence of the helical induction force is positive. It is possible to obtain a liquid crystal / polymer composite material that can express the blue phase III in a state of not coexisting in a very wide temperature range (for example, a temperature range of 2 ° C. or more).
- the liquid crystal / polymer composite material of the present invention obtained by polymerizing a liquid crystal composition containing a polymerizable compound that expresses a blue phase, particularly blue phase III, has an expression temperature without losing the high-speed response of the blue phase. Since the range is expanded compared with the conventional range, it is suitable as a raw material for a liquid crystal optical element driven in an optically isotropic phase.
- the color filter in the present invention includes a black matrix and at least an RGB three-color pixel portion.
- the RGB three-color pixel portion has a diketopyrrolopyrrole pigment and / or an anionic red organic as a coloring material in the R pixel portion.
- the RGB three-color pixel portion is a color material that contains C.I. I. Solvent Red 124 with C.I. I. Solvent Blue 67 and C.I. I. A mixture of Solvent Yellow 162 is mixed with C.I. I. It is preferable to contain Solvent Blue 7.
- the RGB three-color pixel portion has a C.I. I. Pigment Red 254 in the G pixel part. I. Pigment Green 7 and / or 36 in the B pixel portion. I. It is also preferable to contain Pigment Blue 15: 6.
- the RGB three-color pixel portion further includes C.I. I. Pigment Red 177, 242, 166, 167, 179, C.I. I. Pigment Orange 38, 71, C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 150, 215, 185, 138, 139, C.I. I. Solvent Red 89, C.I. I. Solvent Orange 56, C.I. I. It is preferable to contain at least one organic dye / pigment selected from the group consisting of Solvent Yellow 21, 82, 83: 1, 33, 162.
- the RGB three-color pixel portion further includes C.I. I. Pigment Yellow 150, 215, 185, 138, C.I. I. It is preferable to contain at least one organic dye / pigment selected from the group consisting of Solvent Yellow 21, 82, 83: 1, and 33.
- the RGB three-color pixel portion is further used as a color material in the B pixel portion.
- the color filter is composed of a black matrix, an RGB three-color pixel portion, and a Y pixel portion.
- the color filter can form a color filter pixel portion by a conventionally known method.
- a typical method for forming the pixel portion is a photolithography method, which applies and heats a photocurable composition to be described later on the surface of the transparent substrate for the color filter provided with the black matrix. After drying (pre-baking), pattern exposure is performed by irradiating ultraviolet rays through a photomask to cure the photo-curable compound at the location corresponding to the pixel portion, and then developing the unexposed portion with a developer. In this method, the non-pixel portion is removed and the pixel portion is fixed to the transparent substrate. In this method, a pixel portion made of a cured colored film of a photocurable composition is formed on a transparent substrate.
- a photocurable composition to be described later is prepared for each pixel of other colors such as an R pixel, a G pixel, a B pixel, and a Y pixel as necessary.
- a color filter having colored pixel portions of pixels, G pixels, B pixels, and Y pixels can be manufactured.
- Examples of a method for applying a photocurable composition described later on a transparent substrate such as glass include a spin coat method, a roll coat method, and an ink jet method.
- the drying conditions for the coating film of the photocurable composition applied to the transparent substrate are usually about 50 to 150 ° C. for about 1 to 15 minutes, although it varies depending on the type of each component, the blending ratio, and the like.
- the light used for photocuring the photocurable composition it is preferable to use ultraviolet rays or visible light in the wavelength range of 200 to 500 nm. Various light sources that emit light in this wavelength range can be used.
- Examples of the developing method include a liquid filling method, a dipping method, and a spray method.
- the transparent substrate on which the necessary color pixel portion is formed is washed with water and dried.
- the color filter thus obtained is subjected to a heat treatment (post-baking) at 90 to 280 ° C. for a predetermined time by a heating device such as a hot plate or an oven, thereby removing volatile components in the colored coating film and simultaneously applying light.
- the unreacted photocurable compound remaining in the cured colored film of the curable composition is thermally cured to complete the color filter.
- the color material for a color filter of the present invention By using the color material for a color filter of the present invention with the liquid crystal composition of the present invention, the voltage holding ratio (VHR) of the liquid crystal layer is reduced and the ion density (ID) is prevented from being increased. It is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device that solves the problem of display defects such as baking.
- the color filter dye and / or pigment composition of the present invention an organic solvent and a dispersant are used as essential components, and these are mixed and stirred so as to be uniform.
- a pigment dispersion for forming the pixel portion of the color filter is prepared by dispersion, and then a photocurable compound and, if necessary, a thermoplastic resin or a photopolymerization initiator are added. The method of making the said photocurable composition is common.
- organic solvent used here examples include aromatic solvents such as toluene, xylene, methoxybenzene, ethyl acetate, propyl acetate, butyl acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol methyl ether acetate.
- aromatic solvents such as toluene, xylene, methoxybenzene, ethyl acetate, propyl acetate, butyl acetate, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol methyl ether acetate.
- Acetate solvents such as diethylene glycol ethyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol propyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol butyl ether acetate, propionate solvents such as ethoxyethyl propionate, alcohol solvents such as methanol and ethanol, butyl cellosolve, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol ethyl Ether, diethylene glycol dimethyl ether Ether solvents such as tellurium, ketone solvents such as methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone and cyclohexanone, aliphatic hydrocarbon solvents such as hexane, N, N-dimethylformamide, ⁇ -butyrolactam, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, aniline And nitrogen compound solvents such as pyridine, lactone solvents such as ⁇ -butyrolactone, and carbamate esters such as a 48:52 mixture of
- Dispersants used here include, for example, Big Chemie's Dispersic 130, Dispersic 161, Dispersic 162, Dispersic 163, Dispersic 170, Dispersic 171, Dispersic 174, Dispersic 180, Dispersic 182, Dispersic 183, Dispersic 184, Dispersic 185, Dispersic 2000, Dispersic 2001, Dispersic 2020, Dispersic 2050, Dispersic 2070, Dispersic 2096, Dispersic 2150, Dispersic LPN21116, Dispersic LPN6919 Efka EFKA 46, EFKA 47, EFKA 452, EFKA LP4008, EFKA 009, Efka LP4010, Efka LP4050, LP4055, Efka400, Efka401, Evka402, Efka403, Efka450, Efka451, Efka453, Efka4540, Efka4550, EfkaLP4560, Efka120, Efka150, Evka
- rosin such as acrylic resin, urethane resin, alkyd resin, wood rosin, gum rosin, tall oil rosin, polymerized rosin, disproportionated rosin, hydrogenated rosin, oxidized rosin, modified rosin such as maleated rosin, Rosin derivatives such as rosinamine, lime rosin, rosin alkylene oxide adduct, rosin alkyd adduct, rosin modified phenol
- a synthetic resin that is liquid and water-insoluble at room temperature can be contained. Addition of these dispersants and resins also contributes to reduction of flocculation, improvement of pigment dispersion stability, and improvement of viscosity characteristics of the dispersion.
- thermoplastic resin used for the preparation of the photocurable composition include urethane resins, acrylic resins, polyamide resins, polyimide resins, styrene maleic acid resins, styrene maleic anhydride resins, and the like. .
- photocurable compound examples include 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate, ethylene glycol diacrylate, neopentyl glycol diacrylate, triethylene glycol diacrylate, bis (acryloxyethoxy) bisphenol A, and 3-methylpentanediol diacrylate.
- Bifunctional monomers such as acrylate, trimethylol propaton triacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, tris [2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl) isocyanurate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate, etc.
- High molecular weight such as low molecular weight polyfunctional monomer, polyester acrylate, polyurethane acrylate, polyether acrylate, etc. Polyfunctional monomers.
- photopolymerization initiator examples include acetophenone, benzophenone, benzyldimethylketanol, benzoyl peroxide, 2-chlorothioxanthone, 1,3-bis (4′-azidobenzal) -2-propane, 1,3-bis (4 ′ -Azidobenzal) -2-propane-2'-sulfonic acid, 4,4'-diazidostilbene-2,2'-disulfonic acid, and the like.
- photopolymerization initiators include, for example, “Irgacure (trade name) -184”, “Irgacure (trade name) -369”, “Darocur (trade name) -1173” manufactured by BASF, “Lucirin- "TPO”, Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. "Kayacure (trade name) DETX”, “Kayacure (trade name) OA”, Stofer “Bicure 10", “Bicure 55", Akzo "Trigonal PI”, Sand “Sandray 1000" manufactured by Upjohn, “Deep” manufactured by Upjohn, and “Biimidazole” manufactured by Kurokin Kasei.
- a well-known and usual photosensitizer can also be used together with the said photoinitiator.
- the photosensitizer include amines, ureas, compounds having a sulfur atom, compounds having a phosphorus atom, compounds having a chlorine atom, nitriles or other compounds having a nitrogen atom. These can be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the blending ratio of the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited, but is preferably in the range of 0.1 to 30% with respect to the compound having a photopolymerizable or photocurable functional group on a mass basis.
- the photosensitivity at the time of photocuring tends to decrease, and if it exceeds 30%, crystals of the photopolymerization initiator are precipitated when the pigment-dispersed resist coating film is dried. May cause deterioration of film properties.
- the materials as described above 300 to 1000 parts of an organic solvent and 1 to 100 parts of a dispersant per 100 parts of the color filter dye and / or pigment composition of the present invention on a mass basis.
- the dye / pigment solution can be obtained by stirring and dispersing so as to be uniform.
- the pigment dispersion is combined with 3 to 20 parts in total of the thermoplastic resin and the photocurable compound per 1 part of the pigment composition for a color filter of the present invention, and 0.05 to 3 parts per 1 part of the photocurable compound.
- a photopolymerization initiator and, if necessary, an organic solvent may be further added, and a photocurable composition for forming a color filter pixel portion can be obtained by stirring and dispersing so as to be uniform.
- the developer a known and commonly used organic solvent or alkaline aqueous solution can be used.
- the photocurable composition contains a thermoplastic resin or a photocurable compound, and at least one of them has an acid value and exhibits alkali solubility
- the color filter can be washed with an alkaline aqueous solution. It is effective for forming the pixel portion.
- the manufacturing method of the color filter pixel part by the photolithographic method was described in detail, the color filter pixel part prepared by using the pigment composition for the color filter of the present invention can be used in other electrodeposition methods, transfer methods, and micelle electrolysis methods.
- a color filter may be manufactured by forming each color pixel portion by a PVED (Photovoltaic Electrodeposition) method, an inkjet method, a reverse printing method, a thermosetting method, or the like.
- PVED Photovoltaic Electrodeposition
- an alignment film for aligning the liquid crystal composition can be provided on the surface of the first substrate that is in contact with the liquid crystal composition on the second substrate.
- an alignment film is disposed between the color filter and the liquid crystal layer. It does not completely block the interaction between the liquid crystal compound constituting the liquid crystal layer. Further, in a liquid crystal display device that does not use an alignment film, the interaction between a pigment such as a pigment constituting a color filter and a liquid crystal compound constituting a liquid crystal layer becomes larger.
- alignment film material transparent organic materials such as polyimide, polyamide, BCB (Penzocyclobutene Polymer), polyvinyl alcohol and the like can be used. Particularly, p-phenylenediamine, 4,4′-diaminodiphenylmethane, etc.
- Aliphatic or alicyclic tetracarboxylic anhydrides such as aliphatic or alicyclic diamines, butanetetracarboxylic anhydride, 2,3,5-tricarboxycyclopentylacetic anhydride, pyromellitic dianhydride
- a polyimide alignment film obtained by imidizing a polyamic acid synthesized from an aromatic tetracarboxylic anhydride such as a product is preferable.
- rubbing is generally used as a method for imparting orientation, but when used for a vertical orientation film or the like, it can be used without imparting orientation.
- the alignment film material a material containing chalcone, cinnamate, cinnamoyl or azo group in the compound can be used, and it may be used in combination with materials such as polyimide and polyamide. In this case, the alignment film is rubbed. Or a photo-alignment technique may be used.
- the alignment film is generally formed by applying the alignment film material on a substrate by a method such as spin coating to form a resin film, but a uniaxial stretching method, Langmuir-Blodgett method, or the like can also be used. .
- a conductive metal oxide can be used as a material for the transparent electrode.
- the metal oxide include indium oxide (In 2 O 3 ), tin oxide (SnO 2 ), and zinc oxide.
- ZnO indium tin oxide
- In 2 O 3 —SnO 2 indium zinc oxide
- In 2 O 3 —ZnO indium gallium oxide zinc
- IGZO niobium-doped titanium dioxide
- Ti 1-x Nb x O 2 niobium-doped titanium dioxide
- fluorine-doped tin oxide, graphene, metal nanowires, or the like can be used, but zinc oxide (ZnO), indium tin oxide (In 2 O 3 —SnO 2 ), indium gallium zinc (IGZO), or Indium zinc oxide (In 2 O 3 —ZnO) is preferred.
- a photo-etching method or a method using a mask can be used.
- the liquid crystal display device may be a flexible display element.
- the electrode substrate is preferably a flexible substrate such as a plastic substrate or a thin film glass substrate.
- a flexible electrode material such as graphene (a sheet made of a carbon monoatomic layer) or an organic semiconductor.
- the structure of the organic TFT is preferably a top contact or a bottom contact, more preferably a bottom gate / bottom contact type.
- the core organic semiconductor is a metal (Cu, Pb, Ni) phthalocyanine derivative, a metal porphyrin derivative, or a pentacene derivative.
- organic semiconductors can be doped, and iodine-doped polypyrrole, iodine-doped polyacetylene, and the like are preferable.
- organic semiconductor compound in which liquid crystal properties are imparted to the above compound.
- liquid crystalline organic semiconductor compounds may be low molecular, high molecular, or supramolecular, and preferably have a columnar structure or a layer structure in order to transport electrons and holes.
- the graphene material may be produced either top-down or bottom-up.
- the top-down method may be the Scotch tape method, Modified Hummers method, or supercritical method.
- the bottom-up method may be a thermal CVD method or a graphene growth method on SiC.
- the transistor used is preferably peeled / transferred, CVD / transferred, or SiC surface pyrolysis.
- graphene is formed on an insulating substrate by CVD at a low temperature of 650 ° C.
- a technique for directly forming a transistor on the entire surface of the substrate is preferred (Fujitsu Laboratories).
- a method of forming a graphene film by CVD on a thin Cu film and transferring it to another substrate is preferable.
- a method of sticking a Cu film in a cylindrical quartz tube having a diameter of 8 inches or more, performing CVD on the tube, taking it out and making it adhere to the polymer film and then peeling off (roll-to-roll method) is preferable (X. Li et al., Science, 324, 1312-1314 (2010)).
- Gold is used for the gate electrode, platinum / gold is used for the source and drain electrodes, and a polymer material is preferably used for the gate insulating film and the passivation film.
- a pentacene film is formed by vapor deposition. Is more preferable.
- a device such as a laminated electrode. It is preferable as a display element to integrate an organic TFT with a top emission organic EL with high definition.
- a method for manufacturing a display element using an organic semiconductor is preferably a printing method (printable electronics), and it is preferable to use a graphene transistor manufactured by a printing method. It is also preferable to use metal nanoparticle materials such as nanosilver particles and nanocopper particles for printed wiring used in the flexible display element.
- a printing method for obtaining an organic semiconductor exceeding amorphous silicon a “double shot” printing method in which two types of ink, which dissolves an organic semiconductor and ink that promotes crystallization of the organic semiconductor, is also preferable.
- C8-BTBT dioctylbenzothienobenzothiophene
- the liquid crystal display device can perform 3D display by space division such as a polarization method, a parallax barrier method, and an integral imaging method, wavelength division such as a spectroscopic method and an anaglyph, an FPS mode, and the like.
- Display method As a display method, it can be used as a birefringence mode in which an electric field is applied in a substantially horizontal direction with respect to a substrate to generate a refractive index ellipsoid, and an IPS (In-Plane Switching) mode and FFS (Fringe Field Switching) are used.
- the mode is typical.
- the IPS mode the structure of the comb-shaped electrode such as S-IPS (Super IPS), AS-IPS (Advanced Super IPS), IPS-Pro (IPS-Productus), etc. is bent substantially horizontally with respect to the substrate.
- the comb electrode can be a metal electrode, but in order to increase the light utilization efficiency of the electrode portion, it is preferable to use a transparent electrode such as ITO, indium gallium oxide zinc (IGZO), graphene or the like. .
- IGZO indium gallium oxide zinc
- the FFS mode the use of AFFS (Advanced Fringe Field Switching) is preferable in terms of wide viewing angle, high contrast ratio, and low power consumption by eliminating the black matrix in the pixel.
- the present invention can also be used for a VFS mode (Vertical-Field-Switching) in which a vertical electric field is applied to a substrate and an optical path is inclined by a prism to enable display.
- VFS mode Very-Field-Switching
- a configuration in which a pair of pixel electrodes and a common electrode are provided on both of the pair of substrates can be employed. Specifically, there are the following methods. It is preferable to provide IPS, S-IPS, AS-IPS, IPS-Pro, FFS, AFFS, and VFS electrodes on both of the pair of substrates.
- the electrode is an electrode protruding inside the cell rather than being smooth, An element in which the electric field strength distribution inside the cell is hardly lowered is preferable.
- Protruded Electrode in which an electrode is formed on the surface of a protrusion made of resin on a substrate, and the drive voltage can be lowered by increasing the lateral electric field.
- the protruding electrode structure may be spherical, hemispherical, cubic, rectangular, triangular, trapezoidal, cylindrical, conical, 3-20 prisms, 3-20 pyramids, asymmetric, and the surface is
- the electrode may be smooth or uneven, and the corner of each electrode may be a curved corner or a straight corner.
- the corner of the electrode is preferably a curve, and the height of the protrusion is
- the cell gap is preferably 1 / 10,000 or more, specifically, 1/10000, 1/1000, 1/100, 1/10, 1/9, 1/8, 1/7, 1/6, 1 / 5, 1/4, 1/2, 3/4 or more, or the protruding portion may be in contact with the counter substrate, and the protruding electrode is directly placed on the substrate, or resin, insulator, dielectric, semiconductor, or these It may be installed on a base such as a composite, and the pixel electrode Of the upper, middle, it may be in any of the lower.
- a first substrate and a pair of electrodes that have a shape projecting in the thickness direction of the first substrate and are spaced apart from each other and provided on one surface side of the first substrate
- a structure having a second substrate disposed so that one surface side faces the one surface side of the first substrate Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-171938
- the pixel electrode layer (first electrode layer) and the common electrode layer (second electrode layer) are arranged so as not to overlap each other, and the pixel electrode layer extends from the surface on the ferroelectric liquid crystal layer side of the first substrate to the liquid crystal layer.
- the rib-shaped first structure is provided so as to cover the upper side surface of the first structure, and the common electrode layer is provided so as to protrude from the surface of the first substrate on the ferroelectric liquid crystal layer side to the ferroelectric liquid crystal layer.
- Formed so as to cover the upper side surface of the second rib-shaped structure Japanese Patent Laid-Open No.
- the ferroelectric liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between the first common electrode layer and the second common electrode layer having an opening pattern (slit) facing each other, and the pixel electrode layer having the opening pattern, and the pixel electrode layer is
- the pixel electrode layer is formed on an upper portion of a structure provided so as to protrude from the surface on the ferroelectric liquid crystal layer side of one substrate to the ferroelectric liquid crystal layer, and in the ferroelectric liquid crystal layer, the pixel electrode layer and the first common electrode layer
- a structure Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-133874
- disposed between the second common electrode layer and at least one pair of electrodes is provided so that the maximum electric field region is formed at a position separated from the substrate interface.
- the first structure body and the second structure body are insulators having a dielectric constant higher than that of the liquid crystal material used for the liquid crystal layer, and are provided so as to protrude from the liquid crystal layer (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-8241). , Etc. can be used. Further, by providing a depression in the substrate, a structure that is synonymous with the projection of the pixel electrode can be used.
- Double-penetrating Fringe Field (Journal of Display Technology, 287-289, olVol. 6, 2010) can be used.
- a confined geometry (Lee, SD, 2009, IDW ⁇ 09-Proceeding of the 16th International) has a shape in which the liquid crystal between the electrodes is sealed in a small resin space.
- Display Worksshots 1, pp.111-112) and periodic correlated electrodes (Appl. Phys. Lett. 96, 011102 (2010)) can be used.
- SOG System on Glass
- Circuits on the glass substrate include DACs, power amplifiers, logic circuits, microprocessors, and memories supplied as ICs and LSIs, liquid crystal control circuits, power supply circuits, input / output interface circuits, signal processing circuits, power It is preferable that a peripheral circuit systematized by placing an amplifier or the like on one glass substrate is formed on the glass substrate.
- the light source of the liquid crystal display device is not particularly limited, but an LED is preferable because of low power consumption.
- the LED is preferably installed on the short side rather than the long side of the liquid crystal display device, and the LED is preferably installed on one side rather than two sides, and more preferably only on the corner of the liquid crystal display device.
- blink control technology that reduces or turns off the light in dark areas
- multi-field drive technology drive frequency is distinguished between when displaying moving images and when displaying still images. It is preferable to use a technique for switching the light amount mode between indoors and outdoors or at night and daytime, a technique for temporarily stopping driving using the memory characteristics of the liquid crystal display device, and the like.
- the reflective display element is preferable because external illumination (sunlight, indoor light, etc.) can be used without providing the device with a light source.
- external illumination unsunlight, indoor light, etc.
- a light guide plate or a prism sheet it is preferable to use an allied resin.
- the transparent resin include methacrylic resin (PMMA, etc.), polycarbonate resin, ABS resin (acrylonitrile-styrene-butadiene copolymer resin), MS resin (methyl methacrylate).
- polystyrene resin polystyrene resin
- AS resin acrylonitrile-styrene copolymer resin
- polyolefin resin polyethylene, polypropylene, etc.
- cyclic polyolefin and the like polystyrene resin, AS resin (acrylonitrile-styrene copolymer resin, polyolefin resin, polyethylene, polypropylene, etc.), cyclic polyolefin and the like.
- Contrast improvements include flashing control (a technology that reduces or turns off the light in dark areas), elements with an aperture ratio of 50% or more, highly oriented alignment films and anti-glare films, and field sequential methods. It is preferable to use (a colorization system in which LEDs of RGB three colors are sequentially turned on in a short time less than the temporal resolution of the human eye and the colors are recognized without using color filters).
- a colorization system in which LEDs of RGB three colors are sequentially turned on in a short time less than the temporal resolution of the human eye and the colors are recognized without using color filters.
- an overdrive function the voltage for expressing gradation is high at the rise and low at the fall).
- the liquid crystal display device of the present invention can also be used for a touch panel display element used for tablet PC applications, in which case it has impact resistance, vibration resistance, water and oil repellency, antifouling properties, and fingerprint resistance.
- Influenza virus for use by unspecified number of people such as ATMs (automatic deposit machines), vending machines, ticket vending machines, toilet monitors, photocopiers, public telephones, and medical / nursing / infant applications It is preferable to have virus resistance against viruses such as Norovirus and RS virus, antibacterial properties against Salmonella, Escherichia coli, Staphylococcus aureus, etc., more preferably solvent resistance, acid resistance, It is preferable to have alkali resistance and heat resistance, warehouse, transportation / distribution, manufacturing, maintenance factory, construction site, marine survey, fire fighting and In applications such as inspection, lifesaving (rescue), and disaster prevention, it is preferable to have dustproof, waterproof, salt-resistant, explosion-proof, and radiation-resistant performance, more preferably European explosion-proof standard (ATEX Zone
- the impact resistance is preferably used for a display element that clears a fall of 3 feet on concrete, and the case of the display element is preferably made of an impact-resistant magnesium alloy or a multilayer magnesium alloy.
- the case of the display element is preferably made of an impact-resistant magnesium alloy or a multilayer magnesium alloy.
- SSD In order to ensure vibration, it is preferable to use SSD for storage.
- Dual-ModeMoAllVue (TM) Xstream technology In order to improve visibility even outdoors in direct sunlight, it is preferable to use Dual-ModeMoAllVue (TM) Xstream technology.
- an acrylic resin such as poly (meth) acrylate, a cellulose resin such as triacetate cellulose (TAC), diacetyl cellulose, cellophane, polyethylene terephthalate (PET) ⁇
- Polyester resins such as polyethylene naphthalate, polyamide resins such as 6-nylon, polyolefin resins such as polyethylene and polypropylene, organic polymers such as polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride, polyimide, polyvinyl alcohol, polycarbonate, and ethylene vinyl alcohol, D Examples thereof include xylene resins, urethane resins, ABS resins (acrylonitrile-styrene-butadiene copolymer resins), MS resins (
- the resin contained in the hard coat layer forming composition a known resin can be used, but it is preferable to include an ionizing radiation curable resin in consideration of improving the surface hardness.
- an ionizing radiation curable resin polyfunctional acrylates such as polyhydric alcohol acrylic acid or methacrylic acid ester, polyfunctional acrylate synthesized from diisocyanate and polyhydric alcohol and acrylic acid or methacrylic acid hydroxy ester, etc. And urethane acrylate.
- polyether resins having an acrylate functional group polyester resins, epoxy resins, alkyd resins, spiroacetal resins, polybutadiene resins, polythiol polyene resins, and the like can also be used.
- a polyfunctional (meth) acrylic monomer in consideration of improving the surface hardness, it is preferable to use a polyfunctional (meth) acrylic monomer.
- the polyfunctional (meth) acrylic monomer the hydroxyl group of a polyhydric alcohol having two or more alcoholic hydroxyl groups in one molecule is an esterified product of two or more (meth) acrylic acids. Compounds are preferred.
- polyfunctional (meth) acrylic monomer of the present invention may be an oligomer.
- Commercially available polyfunctional acrylic monomers include Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. (trade name “Diabeam” series, etc.), Nagase ChemteX Corporation (trade name “Denacol” series, etc.), Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.
- a fluorine-containing compound having a polymerizable group may be mentioned.
- the hard coat layer-forming composition contains a fluorine-containing compound having a polymerizable group
- antifouling properties can be imparted to the hard coat layer surface formed by the hard coat layer-forming composition.
- a fluorine-based additive having no polymerizable group is used, the additive floats on the surface of the hard coat layer, so that it is removed from the hard coat surface by wiping with a cloth or the like. For this reason, once the surface is wiped with a cloth or the like, the antifouling property is lost.
- the fluorine-based additive is polymerized together with the hard coat layer, and the antifouling properties are maintained even if the surface is wiped with a cloth or the like.
- the fluorine-containing compound having a polymerizable group having the advantage of the compound having a (meth) acrylate group is more preferable. This is because it is possible to copolymerize with a polyfunctional (meth) acrylate monomer and to increase the hardness by radical polymerization with ionizing radiation.
- the fluorine-containing compound having a polymerizable group is a compound in which the polymerizable group has a (meth) acrylate group. This is because it is possible to copolymerize with a polyfunctional (meth) acrylate monomer and to increase the hardness by radical polymerization with ionizing radiation.
- fluorine-containing compound having a polymerizable group examples include OPTOOL DAC (manufactured by Daikin Industries, Ltd.), SUA1900L10, SUA1900L6 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), UT3971 (manufactured by Nihon Gosei Co., Ltd.), and Defensa TF3001.
- Defensa TF3000 Defensa TF3028 (Dainippon Ink Co., Ltd.), Light Procoat AFC3000 (Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), KNS5300 (Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.), UVHC1105, UVHC8550 (GE Toshiba Silicone Co., Ltd.) ) And the like.
- the amount of the fluorine-containing compound having a polymerizable group is suitably 0.01% by weight or more and 10% by weight or less with respect to the polyfunctional (meth) acrylic monomer of the composition for forming a hard coat layer.
- the amount When the amount is less than 0.01% by weight, sufficient antifouling properties are not exhibited, and the surface energy is larger than 20 mN / m. When the amount exceeds 10% by weight, it is a phase with the polymerizable monomer and the solvent. Since the solubility is not good, the coating liquid may become cloudy and precipitate may occur, which may cause inconveniences such as the occurrence of defects in the coating liquid and the hard coat layer.
- the hard coat layer-forming composition preferably contains a radical photopolymerization initiator for initiating the polymerization reaction of the ionizing radiation curable resin.
- the photoradical polymerization initiator generates radicals by irradiating with ionizing radiation, and initiates a polymerization reaction of the ionizing radiation curable resin.
- Specific examples of the photo radical polymerization initiator include acetophenone, 2,2-diethoxyacetophenone, p-dimethylacetophenone, p-dimethylaminopropiophenone, benzophenone, 2-chlorobenzophenone, 4,4′-dichlorobenzophenone.
- photopolymerization initiators may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- the amount of the radical photopolymerization initiator used is suitably 0.01% by weight or more and 10% by weight or less based on the ionizing radiation curable resin of the hard coat layer forming composition. When the amount is less than 0.01% by weight, a sufficient curing reaction does not proceed when the ionizing radiation is irradiated. When the amount exceeds 10% by weight, the ionizing radiation does not reach the lower part of the hard coat layer.
- the hard coat layer-forming composition may contain, in addition to the above-described components, a modifier for improving the properties of the hard coat layer within a range not impairing the reaction caused by ionizing radiation, You may contain the thermal polymerization inhibitor for preventing the thermal polymerization at the time of manufacture of a coat film, and the dark reaction at the time of the storage of the composition for hard-coat layer formation.
- a modifier for improving the properties of the hard coat layer within a range not impairing the reaction caused by ionizing radiation You may contain the thermal polymerization inhibitor for preventing the thermal polymerization at the time of manufacture of a coat film, and the dark reaction at the time of the storage of the composition for hard-coat layer formation.
- As modifiers coatability improvers, antifoaming agents, thickeners, antistatic agents, inorganic particles, organic particles, organic lubricants, organic polymer compounds, ultraviolet absorbers, light stabilizers, dyes , Pigments, stabilizers and the like.
- the content of these modifiers is preferably 0.01% by weight or more and 5% by weight or less in 100% by weight of the solid content of the composition for forming a hard coat layer.
- the thermal polymerization inhibitor include hydroquinone, hydroquinone monomethyl ether, and 2,5-t-butyl hydroquinone.
- the content of the thermal polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.005 wt% or more and 0.05 wt% or less in 100 wt% of the solid content of the hard coat layer forming composition.
- the composition for forming a hard coat layer may contain various particles in order to impart an antiglare function to the hard coat layer.
- the particles for example, organic particles such as acrylic particles, acrylic styrene particles, polystyrene particles, polycarbonate particles, and melamine particles, and inorganic particles such as silica particle talc, various aluminosilicates, kaolin clay, and MgAl hydrotalcite are appropriately selected. Is done.
- the average particle size of the particles is preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or more and 10 ⁇ m or less, and the average film thickness of the hard coat layer at this time is preferably 2 ⁇ m or more and 20 ⁇ m or less.
- the average particle diameter of the particles When the average particle diameter of the particles is less than 0.5 ⁇ m, it becomes difficult to form irregularities on the surface of the hard coat layer. On the other hand, when the average particle diameter of the particles exceeds 10 ⁇ m, the texture of the resulting hard coat film becomes rough, which may result in a hard coat film that is not suitable for a high-definition display surface. In addition, when the average thickness of the hard coat layer is less than 2 ⁇ m, it may not be possible to obtain sufficient scratch resistance sufficient to be provided on the display surface. On the other hand, when the average film thickness of the hard coat layer exceeds 20 ⁇ m, the degree of curling of the hard coat film to be produced becomes large and handling may be difficult. In terms of scratch resistance, it is also preferable to provide a film having a self-healing function, and it is preferable to self-repair by the elasticity of the film even if it is scratched. .
- the photocatalyst is preferably inorganic particles such as titanium oxide, Ag particles are more preferably nanoparticles, and e + is antiviral.
- a ceramic composite material such as (Earth Plus) having photolytic ability is preferable, and when these antiviral and antibacterial coatings or films are not transparent, it is preferable to apply them other than the display part, and it is transparent. In some cases, it is preferably applied to the entire display element.
- a compound having a property to repel lipid it is preferable to add a compound having a fluorine substitution or a perfluoro group such as a perfluoropolyether acrylate compound to the film.
- a functional film such as “Clear Touch” (Nippon Chemical Co., Ltd.) or an anti-fingerprint (registered trademark) Film (Tsujiden) can be applied to the display element.
- the display element of the present invention preferably has a three-axis gyro, an acceleration sensor, an ambient light sensor, a cellular phone communication such as Wi-Fi, 3G, a digital compass, and a GPS function.
- the UPU used in the tablet PC using the display element of the present invention is preferably a low power consumption, less heat generation and a large number of operations, preferably a single core or dual core, more preferably a quad core, 8-core, 16 -Core, 32-core, 64-core, 128-core, 256-core are preferred.
- the display element of the present invention is an air conditioner, television, washing machine panel / instrument, rice cooker panel / instrument, component panel / instrument, portable music player panel / instrument panel / instrument, Panels / instruments for solar cells, panels / instruments for fuel cells, panels / instruments for hydroelectric power generation, wind power generation, reactors / stirring devices / dispersing devices / drying devices / heating devices / pressurizing devices / compression devices / crushing devices / Panels, instruments, motorcycles used in centrifuges, stretching devices, film production devices, display production devices, vacuum devices, rockets, ships, aircraft, lathes, UV irradiation devices, bonding devices, suction devices, injection devices, vibration devices, etc. ⁇ Panels / instruments for motor vehicles, automobiles, hybrid cars, electric cars, nursing robot panels / instruments, nursing bodysuit panels / instruments , Earthquakes, fires, floods, landslides, eruptions, pyroclastic flows, debris flows, guerrilla heavy rains, reactor accidents, reactor panels
- communication is performed by wireless LAN such as Wi-Fi, 3G, 4th generation communication, 5th generation communication, 6th generation communication, high speed communication network, telephone line, Internet, Bluetooth, infrared, smart grid , “Centralized power generation” such as thermal power and nuclear power generation, etc., smart cities, smart towns, etc.
- wireless LAN such as Wi-Fi, 3G, 4th generation communication, 5th generation communication, 6th generation communication, high speed communication network, telephone line, Internet, Bluetooth, infrared, smart grid , “Centralized power generation” such as thermal power and nuclear power generation, etc., smart cities, smart towns, etc.
- next-generation power transmission systems that efficiently manage the "type power generation” using the latest IT technology, thermal power generation, hydroelectric power generation, nuclear power generation, wind power generation, geothermal power generation, solar cell power generation, Electricity generated by geothermal power generation, fuel cell power generation, ocean current power generation, wave power generation, piezoelectric power generation, renewable energy, etc., and cars, trains, factories, houses, hospitals, schools, government offices, lighting that operate using this electricity It is preferable that it can be used as an information terminal for controlling air conditioning, machines, devices, home appliances, etc. anytime and anywhere.
- tablet PC an electronic book, an electronic textbook, an electronic medical record, an electronic notebook etc.
- pressing force such as a finger and pen input
- the display element of the present invention can be used for a stationary display element such as a desktop personal computer, a large / medium / small-sized control device, and a vending machine.
- a digital signage Electronic signboard
- POP Point's purchase's advertising
- electronic timetable electronic bulletin board
- electronic price tag electronic blackboard
- instrument display etc.
- the display surface may be single-sided, double-sided, sea-through display, particularly preferably finger or pen input. It is most preferable that the touch panel system is applied with pressure.
- a form such as a notebook personal computer, a tablet PC, or a mobile phone is preferable, and a display element of a touch panel system to which a pressing force such as finger or pen input is particularly preferable is most preferable.
- d gap first and second substrates of the cell gap ([mu] m)
- VHR Voltage holding ratio (%) (The value expressed as a ratio of the measured voltage to the initial applied voltage in% when the liquid crystal composition is injected into a cell having a cell thickness of 5 ⁇ m and measured under the conditions of 5 V applied, frame time 200 ms, and pulse width 1 ms.)
- the burn-in evaluation of the liquid crystal display device is based on the following four-stage evaluation of the afterimage level of the fixed pattern when the predetermined fixed pattern is displayed in the display area for 1000 hours and then the entire screen is displayed uniformly. went. ⁇ No afterimage ⁇ Very little afterimage but acceptable level ⁇ With afterimage unacceptable level ⁇ Afterimage fairly bad
- Red dye coloring composition 2 instead of 10 parts of red dye 1 of the red dye coloring composition 1, 8 parts of red dye 1 (CI Solvent Red 124) and 2 parts of yellow dye 2 (CI Solvent Yellow 21) are used. In the same manner as above, a red dye coloring composition 2 was obtained.
- Red dye coloring composition 3 instead of 10 parts of the red dye 1 of the red dye coloring composition 1, 10 parts of red dye 2 (CI Solvent Red 1) was used to obtain a red dye coloring composition 3 in the same manner as described above.
- Green Dye Coloring Composition 1 Instead of 10 parts of the red dye 1 of the red dye coloring composition 1, 3 parts of blue dye 1 (CI Solvent Blue 67) and 7 parts of yellow dye 1 (CI Solvent Yellow 162) are used. In the same manner as above, a green dye coloring composition 1 was obtained.
- Green Dye Coloring Composition 2 7 parts of the yellow dye 1 of the green dye coloring composition 1 are replaced with 4 parts of yellow dye 1 (CI Solvent Yellow 162) and 3 parts of yellow dye 3 (CI Solvent Yellow 82). Similarly, a green dye coloring composition 2 was obtained.
- Green dye coloring composition 3 In the same manner as described above, using 10 parts of green dye 1 (CI Solvent Green 7) instead of 3 parts of blue dye 1 and 7 parts of yellow dye 1 of the above-mentioned green dye coloring composition 1 3 was obtained.
- Blue dye coloring composition 2 instead of 10 parts of blue dye 1 of the blue dye coloring composition 1, 7 parts of blue dye 1 (CI Solvent Blue 7) and 3 parts of purple dye 1 (CI Basic Violet 10) are used. In the same manner as above, a blue dye coloring composition 2 was obtained.
- a yellow dye coloring composition 2 was obtained in the same manner as described above using 10 parts of yellow dye 4 (CI Solvent Yellow 2) instead of 10 parts of yellow dye 2 of the yellow dye coloring composition 1.
- Red pigment coloring composition 1 10 parts of Red Pigment 1 (CI Pigment Red 254, “IRGAPHOR RED BT-CF” manufactured by BASF) is put in a polybin, 55 parts of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, 7.0 parts of Dispersic LPN21116 (manufactured by BYK Chemie) 0.3-0.4 mm ⁇ Sepul beads were added and dispersed for 4 hours with a paint conditioner (manufactured by Toyo Seiki Co., Ltd.), followed by filtration with a 5 ⁇ m filter to obtain a pigment dispersion.
- a paint conditioner manufactured by Toyo Seiki Co., Ltd.
- Red pigment coloring composition 2 instead of 10 parts of red pigment 1 in the above-mentioned red pigment coloring group 1, 6 parts of red pigment 1 and 2 parts of red pigment 2 (FASTOGEN SUPER RED ATY-TR manufactured by CI Pigment Red 177 DIC Corporation), yellow Using 2 parts of Pigment 2 (CI Pigment Yellow 139), a red pigment coloring composition 2 was obtained in the same manner as described above.
- Green pigment coloring composition 1 instead of 10 parts of the red pigment 1 of the red pigment coloring composition 1, 6 parts of green pigment 1 (CI Pigment Green 36, “FASTOGEN GREEN 2YK-CF” manufactured by DIC Corporation) and yellow pigment 1 (C.I. Pigment Yellow 150, 4 parts of FANCHON FAST YELLOW E4GN manufactured by BAYER) was used in the same manner as above to obtain a green pigment coloring composition 1.
- green pigment 1 CI Pigment Green 36, “FASTOGEN GREEN 2YK-CF” manufactured by DIC Corporation
- yellow pigment 1 C.I. Pigment Yellow 150, 4 parts of FANCHON FAST YELLOW E4GN manufactured by BAYER
- Green pigment coloring composition 2 instead of 6 parts of green pigment 1 and 4 parts of yellow pigment 1 in the green pigment coloring composition 1, 4 parts of green pigment 2 (CI Pigment Green 7, FASTOGEN GREEN S manufactured by DIC Corporation) and yellow pigment 3 (C Green pigment coloring composition 2 was obtained in the same manner as described above using 6 parts of I. Pigment YELLOW 138).
- Blue pigment coloring composition 1 instead of 10 parts of the red pigment 1 of the red pigment coloring composition 1, 9 parts of blue pigment 1 (CI Pigment Blue 15: 6, “FASTOGEN BLUE EP-210” manufactured by DIC Corporation) and purple pigment 1 (C Blue pigment coloring composition 1 was obtained in the same manner as described above using 1 part of I. Pigment VIOLET 23).
- a blue pigment dye coloring composition 2 was obtained in the same manner as described above using 1 part of purple dye 1 (CI Basic Violet 10) instead of 1 part of purple pigment 1 of the blue pigment coloring composition 1. .
- the red coloring composition was applied to a glass substrate on which a black matrix had been formed in advance so as to have a film thickness of 2 ⁇ m by spin coating. After drying at 70 ° C. for 20 minutes, striped pattern exposure was performed using a photomask with ultraviolet rays using an exposure machine equipped with an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp. Spray development with an alkali developer for 90 seconds, washing with ion exchange water, and air drying. Further, post-baking was performed at 230 ° C. for 30 minutes in a clean oven to form red pixels, which are striped colored layers, on a transparent substrate. Next, the green coloring composition is similarly applied by spin coating so that the film thickness becomes 2 ⁇ m.
- the striped colored layer was exposed and developed at a place different from the above-mentioned red pixel by an exposure machine, thereby forming a green pixel adjacent to the above-mentioned red pixel.
- red pixels and blue pixels adjacent to the green pixels were formed by spin coating with a film thickness of 2 ⁇ m.
- a color filter having striped pixels of three colors of red, green, and blue on the transparent substrate was obtained.
- a red pixel and a blue pixel adjacent to the green pixel were similarly formed by spin coating with a film thickness of 2 ⁇ m.
- a color filter having striped pixels of four colors of red, green, blue and yellow on the transparent substrate was obtained.
- Color filters 1 to 4 and comparative color filter 1 were prepared using the dye coloring composition or pigment coloring composition shown in Table 1.
- Examples 1 to 4 A color filter having stripe-like pixels was formed on the first substrate (no electrode provided) using the color filters 1 to 4 shown in Table 1.
- a cell holding d gap 5 ⁇ m was constructed using the first and second substrates not subjected to the alignment treatment.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 1 was injected between the substrates by a vacuum injection method to produce liquid crystal display devices of Examples 1 to 4.
- Chiral liquid crystal-containing material 1 was prepared by blending nematic liquid crystal composition LC-1 (95.0%) and chiral compound CH-1 (5.0%).
- the nematic liquid crystal composition LC-1 transitioned from the nematic phase to the isotropic phase at 56.5 ° C.
- the birefringence ( ⁇ n) was 0.164 (measured at 20 ° C. and 589 nm).
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 1 transitioned from a cholesteric phase to a blue phase (cubic) at 36 ° C. upon heating, and from a blue phase (cubic) to a isotropic phase at 43 ° C. Observation with a polarizing microscope shows that even when the cell is rotated at a temperature showing a blue phase (cubic), a complete dark field is maintained, and there is no change and a black equivalent to the isotropic phase is obtained. No light omission was observed. VHR of the obtained liquid crystal display device was measured at a temperature showing a blue phase (cubic). The obtained liquid crystal display device was evaluated for burn-in. The results are shown in Table 2.
- the liquid crystal display devices of Examples 1 to 4 were able to realize a high VHR. In addition, there was no afterimage in the burn-in evaluation, and the result was extremely good.
- Examples 5 to 8 A color filter having stripe-like pixels was formed on the first substrate (no electrode provided) using the color filters 1 to 4 shown in Table 1.
- a cell holding d gap 5 ⁇ m was constructed using the first and second substrates not subjected to the alignment treatment.
- a chiral liquid crystal-containing material 2 was injected between the substrates by a vacuum injection method, and liquid crystal display devices of Examples 5 to 8 were produced.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 2 was prepared by blending the nematic liquid crystal composition LC-2 (95.7%) and the chiral compound CH-1 (4.3%).
- the nematic liquid crystal composition LC-2 transitioned from the nematic phase to the isotropic phase at 66.6 ° C.
- the birefringence ( ⁇ n) was 0.148 (measured at 20 ° C. and 589 nm).
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 2 changed from a cholesteric phase to a blue phase (cubic) at 50 ° C. upon heating, and from a blue phase (cubic) to an isotropic phase at 55 ° C.
- Observation with a polarizing microscope shows that even when the cell is rotated at a temperature showing a blue phase (cubic), a complete dark field is maintained, and there is no change and a black equivalent to the isotropic phase is obtained. No light omission was observed.
- VHR of the obtained liquid crystal display device was measured at a temperature showing a blue phase (cubic).
- the obtained liquid crystal display device was evaluated for burn-in. The results are shown in Table 3.
- the liquid crystal display devices of Examples 5 to 8 were able to realize a high VHR. Further, even in the burn-in evaluation, there was no afterimage, or even a very slight and acceptable level.
- Example 9 to 12 A color filter having stripe-like pixels was formed on the first substrate (no electrode provided) using the color filters 1 to 4 shown in Table 1.
- a cell holding d gap 5 ⁇ m was constructed using the first and second substrates not subjected to the alignment treatment.
- a chiral liquid crystal-containing material 3 was injected between the substrates by a vacuum injection method to produce liquid crystal display devices of Examples 9-12.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 3 was prepared by blending the nematic liquid crystal composition LC-3 (88.0%) and the chiral compound CH-2 (12.0%).
- the nematic liquid crystal composition LC-3 transitioned from a nematic phase to an isotropic phase at 78.7 ° C.
- the birefringence ( ⁇ n) was 0.139 (measured at 25 ° C. and 589 nm), and the dielectric anisotropy ( ⁇ ) was 16.4 (measured at 25 ° C.).
- the liquid crystal composition 3 transitioned from a cholesteric phase to a blue phase (cubic) at 59 ° C. by heating, and from a blue phase (cubic) to an isotropic phase at 64.3 ° C.
- the liquid crystal display devices of Examples 9 to 12 were able to realize a high VHR. In addition, there was no afterimage in the burn-in evaluation, and the result was extremely good.
- Example 13 to 16 A color filter having stripe-like pixels was formed on the first substrate (no electrode provided) using the color filters 1 to 4 shown in Table 1.
- a cell holding d gap 5 ⁇ m was constructed using the first and second substrates not subjected to the alignment treatment.
- a chiral liquid crystal-containing material 4 was injected between the substrates by a vacuum injection method to produce liquid crystal display devices of Examples 13 to 16.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 4 was prepared by blending the nematic liquid crystal composition LC-4 (95.5%) and the chiral compound CH-3 (4.5%).
- the nematic liquid crystal composition LC-4 transitioned from a nematic phase to an isotropic phase at 83.1 ° C.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 4 transitioned from a blue phase (cubic) to an isotropic phase at 75.1 ° C. upon heating. Observation with a polarizing microscope shows that even when the cell is rotated at a temperature showing a blue phase (cubic), a complete dark field is maintained, and there is no change and a black equivalent to the isotropic phase is obtained. No light omission was observed. VHR of the obtained liquid crystal display device was measured at a temperature showing a blue phase (cubic). The obtained liquid crystal display device was evaluated for burn-in. The results are shown in Table 5.
- liquid crystal display devices of Examples 13 to 16 were able to realize a high VHR. Further, even in the burn-in evaluation, there was no afterimage, or even a very slight and acceptable level.
- Examples 17 to 20 A color filter having stripe-like pixels was formed on the first substrate (no electrode provided) using the color filters 1 to 4 shown in Table 1.
- a cell holding d gap 5 ⁇ m was constructed using the first and second substrates not subjected to the alignment treatment.
- a chiral liquid crystal-containing material 5 was injected between the substrates by a vacuum injection method to prepare liquid crystal display devices of Examples 17 to 20.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 5 was prepared by blending the nematic liquid crystal composition LC-5 (94.0%) and the chiral compound CH-3 (6.0%).
- the nematic liquid crystal composition LC-5 transitioned from a nematic phase to an isotropic phase at 82.8 ° C.
- the birefringence ( ⁇ n) was 0.180 (measured at 25 ° C. and 589 nm).
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 5 transitioned from a blue phase (cubic) to an isotropic phase at 72.2 ° C. upon heating. Observation with a polarizing microscope shows that even when the cell is rotated at a temperature showing a blue phase (cubic), a complete dark field is maintained, and there is no change and a black equivalent to the isotropic phase is obtained. No light omission was observed.
- VHR of the obtained liquid crystal display device was measured at a temperature showing a blue phase (cubic).
- the obtained liquid crystal display device was evaluated for burn-in. The results are shown in Table 6.
- the liquid crystal display devices of Examples 17 to 20 were able to realize high VHR. In addition, there was no afterimage in the burn-in evaluation, and the result was extremely good.
- Example 21 to 24 A color filter having stripe-like pixels was formed on the first substrate (no electrode provided) using the color filters 1 to 4 shown in Table 1.
- a cell holding d gap 5 ⁇ m was constructed using the first and second substrates not subjected to the alignment treatment.
- a chiral liquid crystal-containing material 6 was injected between the substrates by a vacuum injection method to produce liquid crystal display devices of Examples 21 to 24.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 6 was prepared by blending the nematic liquid crystal composition LC-6 (88.0%) and the chiral compound CH-2 (12.0%).
- the nematic liquid crystal composition LC-6 transitioned from the nematic phase to the isotropic phase at 73.0 ° C.
- the birefringence ( ⁇ n) was 0.128 (measured at 25 ° C. and 589 nm), and the dielectric anisotropy ( ⁇ ) was ⁇ 4.0 (measured at 25 ° C.).
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 6 transitioned from a cholesteric phase to a blue phase (cubic) at 54 ° C. on heating, and from a blue phase (cubic) to an isotropic phase at 58.6 ° C.
- the liquid crystal display devices of Examples 21 to 24 were able to realize a high VHR. In addition, there was no afterimage in the burn-in evaluation, and the result was extremely good.
- Examples 25 to 28 A color filter having stripe-like pixels was formed on the first substrate (no electrode provided) using the color filters 1 to 4 shown in Table 1.
- a cell holding d gap 5 ⁇ m was constructed using the first and second substrates not subjected to the alignment treatment.
- a chiral liquid crystal-containing material 7 was injected between the substrates by a vacuum injection method, and liquid crystal display devices of Examples 25 to 28 were produced.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 7 was prepared by blending the nematic liquid crystal composition LC-7 (80.0%) and the chiral compound CH-4 (20.0%).
- the nematic liquid crystal composition LC-7 showed a nematic phase from ⁇ 29 ° C., and transitioned from the nematic phase to the isotropic phase at 101.3 ° C.
- the birefringence ( ⁇ n) was 0.239 (measured at 25 ° C. and 589 nm), and the dielectric anisotropy ( ⁇ ) was 27.75 (measured at 25 ° C.).
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 7 changes from a cholesteric phase to a blue phase (cubic) at 61.3 ° C. upon heating, and from a blue phase (cubic) to a blue phase (amorphous) at 64.9 ° C., and 69.6 ° C.
- the liquid crystal display devices of Examples 25 to 28 were able to realize a high VHR. In addition, there was no afterimage in the burn-in evaluation, and the result was extremely good.
- a liquid crystal display device of Comparative Example 1 was produced in the same manner as in Examples 1 to 4 except that the comparative color filter 1 shown in Table 1 was used.
- a liquid crystal display device of Comparative Example 2 was produced in the same manner as in Examples 5 to 8 except that the comparative color filter 1 shown in Table 1 was used.
- a liquid crystal display device of Comparative Example 3 was produced in the same manner as in Examples 9 to 12 except that the comparative color filter 1 shown in Table 1 was used.
- a liquid crystal display device of Comparative Example 4 was produced in the same manner as in Examples 13 to 16 except that the comparative color filter 1 shown in Table 1 was used.
- a liquid crystal display device of Comparative Example 5 was produced in the same manner as in Examples 17 to 20 except that the comparative color filter 1 shown in Table 1 was used.
- a liquid crystal display device of Comparative Example 6 was produced in the same manner as in Examples 21 to 24 except that the comparative color filter 1 shown in Table 1 was used.
- a liquid crystal display device of Comparative Example 7 was produced in the same manner as in Examples 25 to 28 except that the comparative color filter 1 shown in Table 1 was used.
- the liquid crystal display devices of Comparative Examples 1 to 7 had a lower VHR than the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, and an afterimage was observed in the burn-in evaluation, which was not an acceptable level.
- Comparative Examples 8 to 11 Liquid crystal display devices of Comparative Examples 8 to 11 were produced in the same manner as in Examples 1 to 4 except that the comparative chiral liquid crystal-containing material 1 was used.
- Comparative chiral liquid crystal-containing material 1 was prepared by blending nematic liquid crystal composition LC-8 (95.0%) and chiral compound CH-5 (5.0%).
- the nematic liquid crystal composition LC-8 transitioned from a nematic phase to an isotropic phase at 35 ° C.
- the birefringence ( ⁇ n) was 0.184 (measured at 20 ° C. and 589 nm), and the dielectric anisotropy ( ⁇ ) was 11.0 (measured at 26 ° C.).
- the comparative chiral liquid crystal-containing material 1 transitioned from the cholesteric phase to the isotropic phase without showing a blue phase at 30 ° C. on heating.
- VHR of the obtained liquid crystal display device was measured at 25 degreeC which is the temperature which shows a cholesteric phase.
- the obtained liquid crystal display device was evaluated for burn-in. The results are shown in Table 11.
- the liquid crystal display devices of Comparative Examples 8 to 11 had a lower VHR than the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, and an afterimage was observed in the burn-in evaluation, which was not an acceptable level.
- Example 29 to 32 A color filter having stripe-like pixels was formed on the first substrate (no electrode provided) using the color filters 1 to 4 shown in Table 1.
- a cell holding d gap 5 ⁇ m was constructed using the first and second substrates not subjected to the alignment treatment.
- a chiral liquid crystal-containing material 8 was injected between the substrates by a vacuum injection method.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing composition 8 was prepared by blending 88.8% of the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 1 and 11.2% of the monomer mixture 1 described below.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 8 transitioned from a cholesteric phase to a blue phase (cubic) at 14 ° C. upon heating, and from a blue phase (cubic) to an isotropic phase at 20.6 ° C.
- a liquid crystal display device comprising the liquid crystal / polymer composite material 1 of Examples 29 to 32 was produced.
- a complete dark field is maintained even when the cell is rotated, and there is no change and a black equivalent to the isotropic phase is obtained. It was confirmed to be blue phase (cubic).
- VHR of the obtained liquid crystal display device was measured at a temperature showing a blue phase (cubic). The obtained liquid crystal display device was evaluated for burn-in. The results are shown in Table 12.
- the liquid crystal display devices of Examples 29 to 32 were able to realize a high VHR. In addition, there was no afterimage in the burn-in evaluation, and the result was extremely good.
- Examples 33 to 36 A color filter having stripe-like pixels was formed on the first substrate (no electrode provided) using the color filters 1 to 4 shown in Table 1.
- a cell holding d gap 5 ⁇ m was constructed using the first and second substrates not subjected to the alignment treatment.
- a chiral liquid crystal-containing material 9 was injected between the substrates by a vacuum injection method. The chiral liquid crystal-containing material 9 was prepared by blending 88.8% of the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 2 and 11.2% of the monomer mixture 1 described above.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 9 changed from a cholesteric phase to a blue phase (cubic) at 28 ° C. upon heating, and from a blue phase (cubic) to an isotropic phase at 32.6 ° C.
- a liquid crystal display device comprising the liquid crystal / polymer composite material 2 of Examples 33 to 36 was produced.
- a complete dark field is maintained even when the cell is rotated, and there is no change and a black color equivalent to the isotropic isotropic phase is obtained. It was confirmed that it was a blue phase (cubic).
- VHR of the obtained liquid crystal display device was measured at a temperature showing a blue phase (cubic). The obtained liquid crystal display device was evaluated for burn-in. The results are shown in Table 13.
- liquid crystal display devices of Examples 33 to 36 were able to realize high VHR. In addition, there was no afterimage in the burn-in evaluation, and the result was extremely good.
- Examples 37 to 40 A color filter having stripe-like pixels was formed on the first substrate (no electrode provided) using the color filters 1 to 4 shown in Table 1.
- a cell holding d gap 5 ⁇ m was constructed using the first and second substrates not subjected to the alignment treatment.
- a chiral liquid crystal-containing material 10 was injected between the substrates by a vacuum injection method. The chiral liquid crystal-containing material 10 was prepared by blending 87.1% of the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 3 and 12.9% of the monomer mixture 2 described below.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 10 transitioned from a cholesteric phase to a blue phase (cubic) at 44 ° C. upon heating, and from a blue phase (cubic) to an isotropic phase at 49.6 ° C.
- a liquid crystal display device comprising the liquid crystal / polymer composite material 3 of Examples 37 to 40 was produced.
- a complete dark field is maintained even when the cell is rotated, and there is no change and a black equivalent to the isotropic phase is obtained. It was confirmed to be blue phase (cubic).
- VHR of the obtained liquid crystal display device was measured at a temperature showing a blue phase (cubic). The obtained liquid crystal display device was evaluated for burn-in. The results are shown in Table 14.
- liquid crystal display devices of Examples 37 to 40 were able to realize high VHR. In addition, there was no afterimage in the burn-in evaluation, and the result was extremely good.
- Example 41 to 44 A color filter having stripe-like pixels was formed on the first substrate (no electrode provided) using the color filters 1 to 4 shown in Table 1.
- a cell holding d gap 5 ⁇ m was constructed using the first and second substrates not subjected to the alignment treatment.
- a chiral liquid crystal-containing material 11 was injected between the substrates by a vacuum injection method. The chiral liquid crystal-containing material 11 was prepared by blending 79.4% of the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 4 and 20.6% of the monomer mixture 3 shown below.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 11 transitioned from a blue phase (cubic) to an isotropic phase at 62.9 ° C. upon heating.
- a liquid crystal display device comprising the liquid crystal / polymer composite material 4 of Examples 41 to 44 was produced.
- a complete dark field is maintained even when the cell is rotated, and there is no change and a black equivalent to the isotropic phase is obtained. It was confirmed to be blue phase (cubic).
- VHR of the obtained liquid crystal display device was measured at a temperature showing a blue phase (cubic). The obtained liquid crystal display device was evaluated for burn-in. The results are shown in Table 15.
- the liquid crystal display devices of Examples 41 to 44 were able to realize a high VHR. In addition, there was no afterimage in the burn-in evaluation, and the result was extremely good.
- Example 45 to 48 A color filter having stripe-like pixels was formed on the first substrate (no electrode provided) using the color filters 1 to 4 shown in Table 1.
- a cell holding d gap 5 ⁇ m was constructed using the first and second substrates not subjected to the alignment treatment.
- a chiral liquid crystal-containing material 12 was injected between the substrates by a vacuum injection method. The chiral liquid crystal-containing material 12 was prepared by blending 79.4% of the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 5 and 20.6% of the monomer mixture 3 described above.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 12 changed from a blue phase (cubic) to an isotropic phase at 67.9 ° C. upon heating.
- a liquid crystal display device comprising the liquid crystal / polymer composite material 5 of Examples 45 to 48 was produced.
- a complete dark field is maintained even when the cell is rotated, and there is no change and a black equivalent to the isotropic phase is obtained. It was confirmed to be blue phase (cubic).
- VHR of the obtained liquid crystal display device was measured at a temperature showing a blue phase (cubic). The obtained liquid crystal display device was evaluated for burn-in. The results are shown in Table 16.
- the liquid crystal display devices of Examples 45 to 48 were able to realize a high VHR. In addition, there was no afterimage in the burn-in evaluation, and the result was extremely good.
- Example 49 to 52 A color filter having stripe-like pixels was formed on the first substrate (no electrode provided) using the color filters 1 to 4 shown in Table 1.
- a cell holding d gap 5 ⁇ m was constructed using the first and second substrates not subjected to the alignment treatment.
- a chiral liquid crystal-containing material 13 was injected between the substrates by a vacuum injection method. The chiral liquid crystal-containing material 13 was prepared by blending 87.1% of the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 6 and 12.9% of the monomer mixture 2 described above.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 13 changed from a cholesteric phase to a blue phase (cubic) at 38 ° C. upon heating, and from a blue phase (cubic) to an isotropic phase at 43.9 ° C.
- a liquid crystal display device comprising the liquid crystal / polymer composite material 6 of Examples 49 to 52 was produced.
- a complete dark field is maintained even when the cell is rotated, and there is no change and a black equivalent to the isotropic phase is obtained. It was confirmed to be blue phase (cubic).
- VHR of the obtained liquid crystal display device was measured at a temperature showing a blue phase (cubic). The obtained liquid crystal display device was evaluated for burn-in. The results are shown in Table 17.
- the liquid crystal display devices of Examples 49 to 52 were able to realize a high VHR. In addition, there was no afterimage in the burn-in evaluation, and the result was extremely good.
- Example 53 to 56 A color filter having stripe-like pixels was formed on the first substrate (no electrode provided) using the color filters 1 to 4 shown in Table 1.
- a cell holding d gap 5 ⁇ m was constructed using the first and second substrates not subjected to the alignment treatment.
- a chiral liquid crystal-containing material 14 was injected between the substrates by a vacuum injection method. The chiral liquid crystal-containing material 14 was prepared by blending 89.1% of the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 7 and 10.9% of the monomer mixture 4 shown below.
- the chiral liquid crystal-containing material 14 transitioned from a cholesteric phase to a blue phase (amorphous) at 42.7 ° C. upon heating, and from a blue phase (amorphous) to an isotropic phase at 51.8 ° C.
- a liquid crystal display device comprising the liquid crystal / polymer composite material 7 of Examples 49 to 52 was produced by polymerizing the polymerizable compound. When observed with a polarizing microscope at room temperature, a complete dark field is maintained even when the cell is rotated, and there is no change and a black equivalent to the isotropic phase is obtained. It was confirmed to be a blue phase (amorphous). The VHR of the obtained liquid crystal display device was measured at a temperature showing a blue phase (amorphous). The obtained liquid crystal display device was evaluated for burn-in. The results are shown in Table 18.
- the liquid crystal display devices of Examples 53 to 56 were able to realize high VHR. In addition, there was no afterimage in the burn-in evaluation, and the result was extremely good.
- a liquid crystal display device of Comparative Example 12 was produced in the same manner as in Examples 29 to 32 except that the comparative color filter 1 shown in Table 1 was used.
- a liquid crystal display device of Comparative Example 13 was produced in the same manner as in Examples 33 to 36 except that the comparative color filter 1 shown in Table 1 was used.
- a liquid crystal display device of Comparative Example 14 was produced in the same manner as in Examples 36 to 40 except that the comparative color filter 1 shown in Table 1 was used.
- a liquid crystal display device of Comparative Example 15 was produced in the same manner as in Examples 41 to 44 except that the comparative color filter 1 shown in Table 1 was used.
- a liquid crystal display device of Comparative Example 16 was produced in the same manner as in Examples 45 to 48 except that the comparative color filter 1 shown in Table 1 was used.
- a liquid crystal display device of Comparative Example 17 was produced in the same manner as in Examples 49 to 52 except that the comparative color filter 1 shown in Table 1 was used.
- a liquid crystal display device of Comparative Example 18 was produced in the same manner as in Examples 53 to 56 except that the comparative color filter 1 shown in Table 1 was used.
- the liquid crystal display devices of Comparative Examples 12 to 18 had a lower VHR than the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, and an afterimage was observed in the burn-in evaluation, which was not an acceptable level.
- CH-1 to 5 monomer mixtures 1 to 4
- CH 3 , C 2 H 5 , C 3 H 7 , C 4 H 9 , C 5 H 11 and C 6 H 13 represents a linear alkyl group.
Abstract
Description
前記カラーフィルタ層は、ブラックマトリックスと赤色着色層(R)、緑色着色層(G)、青色着色層(B)、及び必要に応じて黄色着色層(Y)から構成されるカラーフィルタにより構成される。
一方、カラーフィルタ層に用いられる有機顔料等の材料についても、配向膜材料と同様に含有する不純物による、液晶層への影響が想定される。しかし、カラーフィルタ層と液晶層の間には、配向膜と透明電極が介在するため、液晶層への直接的な影響は配向膜材料と比較して大幅に少ないものと考えられていた。しかし、配向膜は通常0.1μm以下の膜厚に過ぎず、透明電極もカラーフィルタ層側に用いられる共通電極は導電率を上げるために膜厚を上げたものでも通常0.5μm以下である。従って、カラーフィルタ層と液晶層は完全に隔離された環境におかれているとは言えず、カラーフィルタ層が、配向膜及び透明電極を介してカラーフィルタ層に含まれる不純物により、液晶表示装置の場合は、液晶層の電圧保持率(VHR)の低下による白抜け、配向むら、焼き付きなどの表示不良を発現する可能性がある。カラーフィルタを構成する顔料に含まれる不純物に起因した表示不良を解決する方法として、顔料の蟻酸エチルによる抽出物の割合を特定値以下とした顔料を用いて、不純物の液晶への溶出を制御する方法(特許文献1)や青色着色層中の顔料を特定することで不純物の液晶への溶出を制御する方法(特許文献2)が検討されてきた。しかしながら、これらの方法では顔料中の不純物を単純に低減することと大きな差異はなく、近年、顔料の精製技術が進歩している現状においても表示不良を解決するための改良としては不十分なものであった。
しかしながら、当該引用文献の開示においても顔料中の不純物による液晶層への影響を抑えることが発明の本質となっており、特にカラーフィルタに使用される染顔料等の色材の構造と液晶材料の構造との直接的な関係については検討が行われておらず、高度化する液晶表示装置の表示不良問題の解決には至っていなかった。
前記RGB三色画素部が、色材として、R画素部中にジケトピロロピロール顔料及び/又はアニオン性赤色有機染料を、G画素部中にハロゲン化銅フタロシニアン顔料、フタロシアニン系緑色染料、フタロシアニン系青色染料とアゾ系黄色有機染料との混合物からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも一種を、B画素部中にε型銅フタロシニアン顔料及び/又はカチオン性青色有機染料を含有することを特徴とする液晶表示装置を提供する。
1a 基板
1b 基板
2 カラーフィルタ層
2a 特定の染料及び/又は顔料を含有するカラーフィルタ層
3a 透明電極層(共通電極)
3b 透明電極層(画素電極)
4 配向膜
5 液晶層
5a キラル液晶含有材料を含有する液晶層
前記表示装置における2枚の基板は、周辺領域に配置されたシール材及び封止材によって貼り合わされていて、多くの場合その間には基板間距離を保持するために粒状スペーサーまたはフォトリソグラフィー法により形成された樹脂からなるスペーサー柱が配置されている。
本発明の液晶表示装置における液晶層は、少なくとも2種類のアキラルな液晶性化合物を含むネマチック液晶組成物と、少なくとも1種類のキラル化合物とを含むキラル液晶含有材料から構成される。
本発明のキラル液晶含有材料に用いられるネマチック液晶組成物は、少なくとも2種類のアキラルな液晶性化合物を含む。当該液晶性化合物としては、アキラルであって、液晶性を示すメソゲン部位(メソゲン基)を有する化合物であれば特に限定されるものではなく、公知の液晶性化合物や、それらを適宜改変したものを用いることができる。
<一般式(I)で表される化合物>
本発明のキラル液晶含有材料に用いられるネマチック液晶組成物としては、一般式(I)で表される化合物を含むことが好ましい。一般式(I)で表される化合物は、Δεの絶対値が比較的小さい液晶性化合物である。
A11、A12及びA13はそれぞれ独立して、
(a) トランス-1,4-シクロへキシレン基(当該基中に存在する1個のメチレン基又は互いに隣接していない2個以上のメチレン基は、それぞれ独立して、酸素原子又は硫黄原子に置換されてもよく、当該基中に存在する1個又は2個以上の水素原子は、それぞれ独立して、シアノ基、フッ素原子又は塩素原子で置換されていてもよい。)、
(b) 1,4-フェニレン基(当該基中に存在する1個の-CH=又は互いに隣接していない2個以上の-CH=は、窒素原子に置換されてもよく、当該基中に存在する1個又は2個以上の水素原子は、それぞれ独立して、シアノ基、フッ素原子又は塩素原子で置換されていてもよい。) 、又は
(c) 1,4-シクロヘキセニレン基、1,4-ビシクロ(2.2.2)オクチレン基、ナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基、デカヒドロナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基、及び1,2,3,4-テトラヒドロナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基からなる群より選択される基(これらの基中に存在する1個の-CH=又は互いに隣接していない2個以上の-CH=は、窒素原子に置換されてもよく、これらの基中に存在する1個又は2個以上の水素原子は、それぞれ独立して、シアノ基、フッ素原子又は塩素原子で置換されていてもよい。)を表し、
a11は0、1、2又は3を表し、
L11及びL12はそれぞれ独立して、単結合、-CH2CH2-、-(CH2)4-、-OCH2-、-CH2O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-CF2CF2-、-OCF2-、-CF2O-、-CH=N-N=CH-、-CH=CH-、-CF=CF-、-C≡C-、-N=N-、-CH=N-、-SCH2-、-CH2S-、―CSO-、-OCS-、-CF2S-、又は-SCF2-を表す。)
R11及びR12がアルケニル基である場合、特に下記に示すいずれかの基であることが好ましい。下記の基においては、右端において環構造と連結するものとする。中でも、ビニル基又は3-ブテニル基がより好ましく、ビニル基が特に好ましい。
一般式(I)中、A11、A12及びA13はそれぞれ独立して、下記(a)基、(b)基、又は(c)基である。a11が2であり、A13が2個存在する場合は、それらは同一でもよく、異なっていてもよい。
(a) トランス-1,4-シクロへキシレン基(当該基中に存在する1個のメチレン基又は互いに隣接していない2個以上のメチレン基は、それぞれ独立して、酸素原子又は硫黄原子に置換されてもよく、当該基中に存在する1個又は2個以上の水素原子は、それぞれ独立して、シアノ基、フッ素原子又は塩素原子で置換されていてもよい。)。
(b) 1,4-フェニレン基(当該基中に存在する1個の-CH=又は互いに隣接していない2個以上の-CH=は、窒素原子に置換されてもよく、当該基中に存在する1個又は2個以上の水素原子は、それぞれ独立して、シアノ基、フッ素原子又は塩素原子で置換されていてもよい。) 。
(c) 1,4-シクロヘキセニレン基、1,4-ビシクロ(2.2.2)オクチレン基、ナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基、デカヒドロナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基、及び1,2,3,4-テトラヒドロナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基からなる群より選択される基(これらの基中に存在する1個の-CH=又は互いに隣接していない2個以上の-CH=は、窒素原子に置換されてもよく、これらの基中に存在する1個又は2個以上の水素原子は、それぞれ独立して、シアノ基、フッ素原子又は塩素原子で置換されていてもよい。)。
本発明のキラル液晶含有材料に用いられるネマチック液晶組成物としては、一般式(II)で表される化合物を少なくとも1種以上含むことが好ましい。一般式(II)で表される化合物は、Δεが比較的大きい液晶性化合物である。
R21は炭素原子数1~16のアルキル基、炭素原子数1~16のアルコキシ基、炭素原子数2~16のアルケニル基、又は炭素原子数2~16のアルケニルオキシ基を表し、前記R21中に存在する1個のメチレン基又は互いに隣接していない2個以上のメチレン基は、それぞれ独立して、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-COO-又は-OCO-に置換されてもよく、前記R21中に存在する1個又は2個以上の水素原子は、それぞれ独立して、フッ素原子又は塩素原子で置換されていてもよく、
L21及びL22はそれぞれ独立して、単結合、-CH2CH2-、-(CH2)4-、-OCH2-、-CH2O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-CF2CF2-、-OCF2-、-CF2O-、-CH=N-N=CH-、-CH=CH-、-CF=CF-、-C≡C-、-N=N-、-CH=N-、-SCH2-、-CH2S-、―CSO-、-OCS-、-CF2S-、又は-SCF2-を表し(L21が2個存在する場合は、それらは同一でもよく、異なっていてもよい。)、
X21は、水素原子、フッ素原子、塩素原子、シアノ基、トリフルオロメチル基、フルオロメトキシ基、ジフルオロメトキシ基、トリフルオロメトキシ基、又は2,2,2-トリフルオロエチル基を表す。)
一般式(II)中のA21、A22及びA23は、一般式(I)中のA11、A12及びA13と同様である。すなわち、A21、A22及びA23はそれぞれ独立して、前記(a)基、(b)基、又は(c)基である。a21が2であり、A22が2個存在する場合は、それらは同一でもよく、異なっていてもよい。
(1)一般式(IIa-1)中、a22が0であり、A25がトランス-1,4-シクロへキシレン基、1,4-フェニレン基、2-フルオロ-1,4-フェニレン基、3-フルオロ-1,4-フェニレン基、又は3,5-ジフルオロ-1,4-フェニレン基であり、L24が単結合、-CH2CH2-、-(CH2)4-、-OCH2-、-CH2O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-OCF2-、-CF2O-、-CH=CH-、又は-C≡C-である化合物。
(2)一般式(IIa-1)中、a22が0であり、A25がデカヒドロナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基、ナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基、1,2,3,4-テトラヒドロナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基、又はピリミジン-2,5-ジイル基(これらの基中に存在する1個又は2個以上の水素原子は、それぞれ独立して、フッ素原子又は塩素原子で置換されていてもよい。)であり、L24が単結合である化合物。
(3)一般式(IIa-1)中、a22が1であり、A24及びA25がそれぞれ独立してトランス-1,4-シクロへキシレン基、1,4-フェニレン基、2-フルオロ-1,4-フェニレン基、3-フルオロ-1,4-フェニレン基、又は3,5-ジフルオロ-1,4-フェニレン基であり、L23及びL24がそれぞれ独立して単結合、-CH2CH2-、-OCH2-、-CH2O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-OCF2-、-CF2O-、-CH=CH-、又は-C≡C-である化合物。
(4)一般式(IIa-1)中、a22が1であり、A24がトランス-1,4-シクロへキシレン基、1,4-フェニレン基、2-フルオロ-1,4-フェニレン基、3-フルオロ-1,4-フェニレン基、又は3,5-ジフルオロ-1,4-フェニレン基であり、A25がデカヒドロナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基、ナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基、1,2,3,4-テトラヒドロナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基、又はピリミジン-2,5-ジイル基(これらの基中に存在する1個又は2個以上の水素原子は、それぞれ独立して、フッ素原子又は塩素原子で置換されていてもよい。)であり、L23及びL24が単結合である化合物。
(5)一般式(IIa-1)中、a22が2であり、2個のA24及び1個のA25がそれぞれ独立してトランス-1,4-シクロへキシレン基、1,4-フェニレン基、2-フルオロ-1,4-フェニレン基、3-フルオロ-1,4-フェニレン基、又は3,5-ジフルオロ-1,4-フェニレン基であり、L23が単結合であり、L24が単結合、-CH2CH2-、-(CH2)4-、-OCH2-、-CH2O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-OCF2-、-CF2O-、-CH=CH-、又は-C≡C-である化合物。
さらに、本発明に用いられるネマチック液晶組成物としては、分子内にシクロヘキサン骨格よりもベンゼン骨格を多く含む液晶性化合物の含有量が、ネマチック液晶組成物中の液晶性化合物全体の50質量%以上であることが好ましく、60質量%以上であることがより好ましい。シクロヘキサン骨格よりもベンゼン骨格を多く含む液晶性化合物の含有割合を高めることにより、キラル化合物を添加することによって光学的等方相、特にブルー相を発現する液晶組成物が得られやすい。中でも、ネマチック液晶組成物中の液晶性化合物全体に対して、分子内にシクロヘキサン骨格よりもベンゼン骨格を多く含む液晶性化合物の含有量が50質量%以上であり、かつ分子内に存在するシクロヘキサン骨格の数がベンゼン骨格の数以上である液晶性化合物の含有量が1~50質量%であるネマチック液晶組成物が好ましい。
また、「シクロヘキサン骨格」には、炭素原子と水素原子のみからなる環構造(シクロヘキシル基、トランス-1,4-シクロへキシレン基)のみならず、当該環構造中に存在する1個のメチレン基又は互いに隣接していない2個以上のメチレン基が酸素原子に置換されている環構造(例えば、4-テトラヒドロピラニル基、1,4-ジオキサニル基、1,3-ジオキサニル基、テトラヒドロピラン-2,5-ジイル基、1,3-ジオキサン-2,5-ジイル基等)、及びこれらの環構造中の1個又は2個以上の水素原子がそれぞれ独立して他の基(例えば、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基等。)に置換されている環構造も含まれる。
本発明のキラル液晶含有材料は、少なくとも1種類のキラル化合物を含む。キラル化合物を含ませることにより、ネマチック液晶組成物に対して捻れ配向を誘起させ、所望のピッチを有するコレステリック相やブルー相を発現する液晶組成物が得られる。
ここで、ピッチとは、液晶分子の螺旋構造における1周期分の長さを示す。ネマチック液晶組成物へのキラル化合物の添加量(質量%)が多くなるほど、ピッチ(μm)は小さくなる。特にキラル化合物の添加量が1~数質量%程度までの低い濃度の時には、キラル化合物の添加量とピッチの積が一定という関係がよく成り立つことが知られており、これの逆数をとった螺旋誘起力(Helical Twisting Power:HTP)(1/μm)が光学活性化合物固有の捻れ配向を誘起する力の評価パラメータとして使用されている。下記数式中、「P」はピッチ(μm)であり、「C」はキラル化合物の添加量(質量%)である。
本発明のキラル液晶含有材料が含むキラル化合物としては、不斉原子をもつ化合物又は軸不斉をもつ化合物が好ましく、不斉原子をもつ化合物が特に好ましい。不斉原子をもつ化合物としては、側鎖部分に不斉炭素を持つ化合物、環構造部分に不斉炭素を持つ化合物及びその両方を持つ化合物が挙げられる。不斉原子をもつ化合物において、不斉原子は不斉炭素原子であると立体反転が起こり難いものが好ましいが、ヘテロ原子が不斉原子となっていてもよい。不斉原子は鎖状構造の一部に導入されていてもよく、環状構造の一部に導入されていてもよい。本発明のキラル液晶含有材料が含むキラル化合物として、螺旋誘起力が強いことを特に要求される場合には、軸不斉をもつ化合物が好ましい。
不斉原子をもつ化合物としては、具体的には、一般式(Ch-I)で表される化合物が好ましい。
Z100及びZ101はそれぞれ独立して、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-O-COO-、-CO-N(R105)-、-N(R105)-CO-、-OCH2-、-CH2O-、-SCH2-、-CH2S-、-CF2O-、-OCF2-、-CF2S-、-SCF2-、-CH2CH2-、-CF2CH2-、-CH2CF2-、-CF2CF2-、-CH=CH-、-CF=CH-、-CH=CF-、-CF=CF-、-C≡C-、-CH=CH-COO-、-OCO-CH=CH-又は単結合を表し、
A100及びA101はそれぞれ独立して、
(a’) トランス-1,4-シクロへキシレン基(当該基中に存在する1個のメチレン基又は隣接していない2個以上のメチレン基は、それぞれ独立して、酸素原子又は硫黄原子に置換されていてもよい。)、
(b’) 1,4-フェニレン基(この基中に存在する1個の-CH=又は隣接していない2個以上の-CH=は、窒素原子に置換されていてもよい。)、又は
(c’) 1,4-シクロヘキセニレン基、1,4-ビシクロ[2.2.2]オクチレン基、インダン-2,5-ジイル、ナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基、デカヒドロナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基及び1,2,3,4-テトラヒドロナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基(これらの基中に存在する1個のメチレン基又は隣接していない2個以上のメチレン基は、それぞれ独立して、酸素原子又は硫黄原子に置換されていてもよく、これらの基中に存在する1個の-CH=又は隣接していない2個以上の-CH=は、窒素原子に置換されていてもよい。)を表し、
A100又はA101が複数存在する場合には、それらは同一でもよく、異なっていてもよく、
n11は0又は1を表し、n11が0を表すとき、m12は0を表し、かつm11は0、1、2、3、4又は5を表し、n11が1を表すとき、m11とm12はそれぞれ独立して0、1、2、3、4又は5を表し、
Dは、下記式(D1)~(D4)で表される2価の基(式(D1)~(D4)中、アステリスク(*)は、キラルな炭素原子を表し、黒丸を付した部位において、Z101(若しくは、R100)又はZ101(若しくは、R100)に、それぞれ結合する。)を表す。)
一般式(Ch-I)中のR100又はR101が炭素原子数1~30個のキラル又はアキラルなアルキル基である場合、当該アルキル基中の1個又は2個以上の隣接していないメチレン基(-CH2-)は、それぞれ独立して、酸素原子又は硫黄原子が相互に直接結合しないものとして-O-、-S-、-NH-、-N(CH3)-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-OCO-O-、-S-CO-、-CO-S-、-CH=CH-、-CF2-、-CF=CH-、-CH=CF-、-CF=CF-又はC≡C-により置換されていてもよく、当該アルキル基中の1個又は2個以上の水素原子は、それぞれ独立して、ハロゲン原子又はシアノ基によって置換されていてもよい。また、当該アルキル基は、直鎖状の基であってもよく、分岐鎖状の基であってもよく、環構造を含んでいる基であってもよい。
一般式(Rd)又は(Ri)中のR104としては、水素原子又は無置換の炭素原子数1~5の直鎖状若しくは分枝状のアルキル基であることが好ましく、水素原子又は無置換の炭素原子数1~3の直鎖状のアルキル基であることがより好ましく、水素原子又はメチル基であることがさらに好ましい。
一般式(Ra)~(Rk)中、n13は0又は1である。
また、一般式(Rk)中、n14は0~5の整数である。
一般式(Ra)~(Rk)中、X101及びX102は、それぞれ独立して、ハロゲン原子(フッ素原子、塩素原子、ブロム原子、ヨウ素原子)、シアノ基、フェニル基(当該フェニル基の1個又は2個以上の任意の水素原子は、それぞれ独立してハロゲン原子、メチル基、メトキシ基、トリフルオロメチル基(-CF3)、トリフルオロメトキシ基(-OCF3)で置換されていてもよい。)、炭素原子数1~6のアルキル基、炭素原子数1~6のアルコキシ基、トリフルオロメチル基又はトリフルオロメトキシ基である。但し、一般式(Ra)、(Rb)、(Rc)、(Rf)、(Rg)、(Rh)においては、X101が結合する炭素原子(*を付した位置)が不斉原子となるように、X101とR103は互いに異なる基である。また、一般式(Rc)及び(Re)において、X101が結合する炭素原子(*を付した位置)が不斉原子となるように、X101とX102は、互いに異なる基である。
一般式(Ch-I)中のR100又はR101が重合性基である場合、当該重合性基としては、下記の式(R-1)~(R-16)のいずれかで表される構造からなる基が好ましい。式(R-1)~(R-14)、(R-16)で表される基は右端が、式(R-15)で表される基は左端が、A100(若しくは、D、Z101)又はA101(若しくは、D、Z100)に、それぞれ結合する。
一般式(Ch-I)中、Z100及びZ101はそれぞれ独立して、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-O-COO-、-CO-N(R105)-、-N(R105)-CO-、-OCH2-、-CH2O-、-SCH2-、-CH2S-、-CF2O-、-OCF2-、-CF2S-、-SCF2-、-CH2CH2-、-CF2CH2-、-CH2CF2-、-CF2CF2-、-CH=CH-、-CF=CH-、-CH=CF-、-CF=CF-、-C≡C-、-CH=CH-COO-、-OCO-CH=CH-又は単結合を表す。ここで、-CO-N(R105)-又は-N(R105)-CO-中のR105は、炭素原子数1~12の直鎖状若しくは分枝状のアルキル基を表し、炭素原子数1~6の直鎖状若しくは分枝状のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素原子数1~4の直鎖状のアルキル基がより好ましい。m11が2以上の整数であり、一分子中にZ100が複数存在する場合には、それらは同一でもよく、異なっていてもよい。同様に、m12が2以上の整数であり、一分子中にZ101が複数存在する場合には、それらは同一でもよく、異なっていてもよい。一般式(Ch-I)で表される化合物としては、Z100及びZ101はそれぞれ独立して、-CF2O-、-OCF2-、-CF2CF2-、-CF=CF-、-COO-、-OCO-、-CH2-CH2-、-C≡C-又は単結合が好ましい。
(a’) トランス-1,4-シクロへキシレン基(当該基中に存在する1個のメチレン基又は隣接していない2個以上のメチレン基は、それぞれ独立して、酸素原子又は硫黄原子に置換されていてもよい。)。
(b’) 1,4-フェニレン基(この基中に存在する1個の-CH=又は隣接していない2個以上の-CH=は、窒素原子に置換されていてもよい。)。
(c’) 1,4-シクロヘキセニレン基、1,4-ビシクロ[2.2.2]オクチレン基、インダン-2,5-ジイル、ナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基、デカヒドロナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基及び1,2,3,4-テトラヒドロナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基(これらの基中に存在する1個のメチレン基又は隣接していない2個以上のメチレン基は、それぞれ独立して酸素原子又は硫黄原子に置換されていてもよく、これらの基中に存在する1個の-CH=又は隣接していない2個以上の-CH=は、窒素原子に置換されていてもよい。)。
n11が0のとき、m12は0であり、かつm11は0、1、2、3、4又は5である。n11及びm12が0のとき、m11は、1、2、3、又は4が好ましく、1、2又は3がより好ましい。
n11が1のとき、m11とm12はそれぞれ独立して0、1、2、3、4又は5、好ましくは1、2、3、又は4、より好ましくは1、2又は3である。n11が1のとき、m11とm12は、互いに異なっていてもよいが、同じであることが好ましい。
一般式(Ch-I)中、Dは、前記式(D1)~(D4)で表される2価の基である。式(D1)~(D4)中、黒丸を付した部位において、Z101(若しくは、R100)又はZ101(若しくは、R100)に、それぞれ結合する。
また、一般式(b1)~(b13)中、A102は、1,4-フェニレン基(当該基中に存在する1個の-CH=又は隣接していない2個以上の-CH=は、窒素原子に置換されていてもよく、当該基中に存在する1個又は2個以上の任意の水素原子は、それぞれ独立して、ハロゲン原子、メチル基、メトキシ基、トリフルオロメチル基、又はトリフルオロメトキシ基によって置換されていてもよい。)である。1,4-フェニレン基中の-CH=や水素原子を置換することにより、当該化合物を含む液晶組成物について、結晶性の低下及び誘電異方性の向きや大きさを制御することができる。
軸不斉化合物としては、具体的には、一般式(IV-1)、(IV-2)、(IV-3)又は(IV-4)で表される化合物が好ましい。
一般式(IV-1)及び(IV-2)中、X71及びX72は、それぞれ独立して、単結合、-COO-、-OCO-、-CH2O-、-OCH2-、-CF2O-、-OCF2-、又は-CH2CH2-を表す。一般式(IV-1)又は(IV-2)で表される化合物としては、X71及びX72は、それぞれ独立して、単結合、-COO-、-OCO-、-CH2O-、-OCH2-、又は-CH2CH2-が好ましく、単結合、-COO-、又は-OCO-がより好ましい。
一般式(IV-1)及び(IV-2)中、m71及びm72は、それぞれ独立して、1~4の整数を表す。但し、一般式(IV-2)において、R73が-X71-(A71-Z71)m71-R71である場合には、2個のm71のうち、いずれか一方は0でもよい。一般式(IV-1)又は(IV-2)で表される化合物としては、m71及びm72は、それぞれ独立して、2又は3が好ましく、2がより好ましい。
一般式(IV-3)中、R63、R64、R65、R66、R67及びR68は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基、アルコキシル基、アシルオキシ基、ハロゲン原子、ハロアルキル基、又はジアルキルアミノ基を表す。一般式(IV-3)中のR63、R64及びR65のうちの2つが、置換基を有していてもよいメチレン鎖、又は置換基を有していてもよいモノ若しくはポリメチレンジオキシ基を形成していてもよく、R66、R67及びR68のうちの2つが、置換基を有していてもよいメチレン鎖、又は置換基を有していてもよいモノ若しくはポリメチレンジオキシ基を形成していてもよい。但し、R65とR66が共に水素原子の場合は除く。
一般式(IV-4)中、E61及びE62は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、アリル基、ベンジル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アルキルエーテル基、アルキルエステル基、アルキルケトン基、複素環基又はこれらの誘導体のいずれかを表す。
一般式(IV-1)で表される化合物としては、具体的には、下記の一般式(K4-1)~(K4-12)で表される化合物が好ましく、一般式(K4-1)~(K4-6)で表される化合物がより好ましく、一般式(K4-3)~(K4-6)で表される化合物がさらに好ましい。一般式(K4-1)~(K4-12)で表される化合物においては、2つのナフタレン環のα位を結ぶ結合が軸不斉の軸である。
面不斉をもつ化合としては、例えば下記一般式(IV-5)で表されるヘリセン(Helicene)誘導体が挙げられる。このようなヘリセン誘導体においては、前後に重なり合う環の前後関係は自由に変換することができないため、環が右向きの螺旋構造をとる場合と左向きの螺旋構造をとる場合とが区別され、キラリティーを発現する。
一般式(IV-5)中、E51及びE52は、それぞれ独立して水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基、アリル基、ベンジル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アルキルエーテル基、アルキルエステル基、アルキルケトン基、複素環基又はこれらの誘導体のいずれかを表す。
本発明のキラル液晶含有材料に用いられるキラル化合物としては、螺旋誘起力が比較的大きなものが好ましい。螺旋誘起力が大きい化合物は、当該キラル化合物が添加されるネマチック液晶組成物の螺旋構造を所望のピッチ(例えば、25℃におけるピッチが0.01~1μm、好ましくは0.05~0.5μm、より好ましくは0.1~0.4μm)にするために必要な添加量を少なくすることができる。
本発明のキラル液晶含有材料は、前記ネマチック液晶組成物とキラル化合物に加えて、さらに少なくとも1種類の重合性化合物が重合してなる高分子を含む液晶・高分子複合材料であるのも好ましい。ネマチック液晶組成物にキラル化合物を含有させることにより得られる光学的等方性相を発現させる液晶組成物が得られ、当該液晶組成物にさらに高分子を加えて安定化させることにより、光学的等方性相、特にブルー相をより広い温度幅で発現させることができる。
本発明の液晶・高分子複合材料は、前記ネマチック液晶組成物とキラル化合物と高分子を混合して調製してもよいが、後述するように、まず、ネマチック液晶組成物とキラル化合物と重合性化合物とを混合した重合性化合物含有液晶組成物を調製した後、当該重合性化合物含有液晶組成物中の重合性基を有する化合物を重合させることによって製造することが好ましい。
重合性化合物は、その構造により、シクロヘキサン骨格やベンゼン骨格等の環構造(メソゲン基)を有する重合性化合物(メソゲン性(液晶性)重合性化合物)と、メソゲン基を有しない重合性化合物(非メソゲン性(非液晶性)重合性化合物)に分類することができる。
メソゲン性重合性化合物としては、下記一般式(PC1)で表される化合物が好ましい。
一般式(PC1)中、Sp1は炭素原子数0~20のスペーサー基を表す。当該スペーサー基としては、2価の基であって、炭素原子数が0~20であれば、特に限定されるものではなく、炭素原子以外の原子を含む基であってもよい。また、直鎖状であってもよく、分岐鎖状であってもよく、環構造を有していてもよい。当該スペーサー基としては、例えば、単結合、炭素原子数1~20のアルキレン基、炭素原子数1~20のアルケニレン基、又は炭素原子数1~20のアリーレン基が挙げられる。当該アルキレン基又はアルケニレン基中の1個又は2個以上の隣接していないメチレン基は、酸素原子及び硫黄原子が相互に直接結合しないものとして、それぞれ独立して、-O-、-S-、-NH-、-N(CH3)-、-CO-、-COO-、-OCO-、-OCOO-、-SCO-、-COS-又は-C≡C-により置換されていてもよい。また、当該アルキレン基又はアルケニレン基中の1個又は2個以上の水素原子は、それぞれ独立して、ハロゲン原子又はシアノ基によって置換されていてもよい。一般式(PC1)で表される化合物としては、Sp1は単結合、無置換の若しくは置換基を有する炭素原子数が1~16のアルキレン基、又は、無置換の若しくは置換基を有する炭素原子数が1~16のアルケニレン基が好ましく、単結合、無置換のアルキレン基、又は置換基のアルケニレン基がより好ましい。
一般式(PC1)中、n1及びn2は、それぞれ独立して1、2又は3を表す。n1が1であり、かつR3が重合性基を有さない場合には、一般式(PC1)で表される化合物は、単官能性の重合性化合物である。一方で、n1が2又は3の場合や、R3が重合性基を有する場合には、一般式(PC1)で表される化合物は、2以上の重合性基を有する多官能性の重合性化合物である。
一般式(MG-1)中、n5は0~5の整数を表す。一般式(PC1)で表される化合物としては、n5は0~3の整数が好ましく、0~2の整数がより好ましく、0又は1がさらに好ましい。
一般式(V-a)中、n31は0又は1の整数を表す。
一般式(V-a)中、T1、T2及びT3はそれぞれ独立して、下記の14種類の環構造を有する2価の基(但し、mは、1~4の整数を表す。)のいずれかを表す。
一般式(V-a)中、Y6は単結合、-O-、-COO-、又は-OCO-を表す。
一般式(V-a)中、R32は水素原子、ハロゲン原子、シアノ基、炭素原子数1~20のアルコキシ基、又は炭素原子数1~20の炭化水素基を表す。当該炭化水素基としては、炭素原子数1~20であって、炭素原子と水素原子からなる1価の基であれば特に限定されるものではなく、炭素原子数1~20のアルキル基、炭素原子数1~20のアルケニル基、炭素原子数1~20のアルキニル基等が挙げられる。
一般式(PC1-1)~(PC1-13)中、W1はそれぞれ独立して、フッ素原子、トリフルオロメチル基、トリフルオロメトキシ基、炭素原子数1~5のアルキル基、炭素原子数1~5のアルコキシ基、炭素原子数2~5のアルケニル基、フェニル基、-COOW2、-OCOW2又は-OCOOW2を表す。-COOW2、-OCOW2、-OCOOW2中、W2はそれぞれ独立して、炭素原子数1~10の直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状のアルキル基、又は炭素原子数2~5の直鎖状若しくは分岐鎖状のアルケニル基を表す。一分子中に複数のW1がある場合には、それらは同一であってもよく、異なっていてもよい。本発明においては、W1はそれぞれ独立して、フッ素原子、トリフルオロメチル基、トリフルオロメトキシ基、炭素原子数1~5のアルキル基、炭素原子数1~5のアルコキシ基、フェニル基、が好ましく、フッ素原子、トリフルオロメチル基、トリフルオロメトキシ基、メチル基、又はメトキシ基がより好ましい。
一般式(PC1-1)~(PC1-13)中、n3はそれぞれ独立して1、2又は3を表し、n4はそれぞれ独立して1、2又は3を表し、n6はそれぞれ独立して0、1、2、3又は4を表し、同一環上におけるn3+n6及びn4+n6は5以下である。本発明においては、n3+n4が2~4が好ましく、2又は3がより好ましい。
一般式(V-b)中に存在する1,4-フェニレン基は、無置換であってもよく、1個又は2個以上の水素原子がそれぞれ独立して、フッ素原子、塩素原子、メチル基、トリフルオロメチル基、トリフルオロメトキシ基、又はフェニル基で置換されていてもよい。
非メソゲン性重合性化合物としては、下記一般式(PC2)で表される化合物が好ましい。
一般式(PC2)中、A32及びA34はそれぞれ独立して、水素原子又は炭素原子数1~18のアルキル基を表す。当該アルキル基中に存在する1個又は2個以上のメチレン基は、酸素原子が相互に直接結合しないものとして、それぞれ独立して、-O-、-CO-、-COO-又は-OCO-で置換されていてもよい。また、当該アルキル基中に存在する1個又は2個以上の水素原子は、それぞれ独立して、ハロゲン原子又は炭素原子数1~17のアルキル基で置換されていてもよい。
一般式(PC2)中、vは1~40の整数を表す。
一般式(PC2-a)又は(PC2-b)中、A37及びA42はそれぞれ独立して、単結合又は炭素原子数1~15のアルキレン基を表す。当該アルキレン基中に存在する1個又は2個以上のメチレン基は、酸素原子が相互に直接結合しないものとして、それぞれ独立して、-O-、-CO-、-COO-又は-OCO-で置換されていてもよい。また、当該アルキレン基中に存在する1個又は2個以上の水素原子は、それぞれ独立して、フッ素原子、メチル基又はエチル基で置換されていてよい。
一般式(PC2-a)又は(PC2-b)中、A39及びA42はそれぞれ独立して、水素原子又は炭素原子数1~10のアルキル基を表す。当該アルキル基中に存在する1個又は2個以上のメチレン基は、酸素原子が相互に直接結合しないものとして、それぞれ独立して、-O-、-CO-、-COO-又は-OCO-で置換されていてもよい。また、当該アルキル基中に存在する1個又は2個以上の水素原子は、それぞれ独立して、ハロゲン原子又は炭素原子数1~9のアルキル基で置換されていてもよい。
一般式(PC2-a)又は(PC2-b)中、A40は炭素原子数9~16のアルキレン基を表す。当該アルキレン基中に存在する少なくとも1個以上5個以下のメチレン基において、当該メチレン基中の任意の1個の水素原子は、炭素原子数1~10の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基で置換されている。また、当該アルキレン基中に存在する1個又は2個以上のメチレン基は、それぞれ独立して、酸素原子が相互に直接結合しないものとして、-O-、-CO-、-COO-又は-OCO-で置換されていてもよい。
よって、一般式(PC2-a)又は(PC2-b)で表される化合物において、A40は、炭素原子数9~16のアルキレン基(当該アルキレン基中に存在する少なくとも1個以上5個以下のメチレン基において、当該メチレン基中の任意の1個の水素原子は、炭素原子数1~10の直鎖状又は分岐鎖状のアルキル基で置換されている。当該アルキレン基中に存在する1個又は2個以上のメチレン基は、酸素原子が相互に直接結合しないものとして、それぞれ独立して、-O-、-CO-、-COO-又は-OCO-で置換されていてもよい。)であることが好ましい。
一方、側鎖であるA38、A39、A41、A42においては、これらの側鎖の長さが次のような態様を有することが好ましい。なお、一般式(PC2-a)又は(PC2-b)において、A38とA39は主鎖の同じ炭素原子に結合しているが、これらの長さが異なるとき、長いほうの側鎖をA38と呼ぶものとする(A38の長さとA39の長さが等しい場合は、いずれが一方をA38とする)。同様に、A41の長さとA42の長さが異なるとき、長いほうの側鎖をA41と呼ぶものとする(A41の長さとA42の長さが等しい場合は、いずれが一方をA41とする)。
そこで、一般式(PC2-a)又は(PC2-b)中、A38及びA41は、好ましくは、それぞれ独立して炭素原子数2~18の直鎖状のアルキル基(当該アルキル基中に存在する1個又は2個以上のメチレン基は、酸素原子が相互に直接結合しないものとして、それぞれ独立して、-O-、-CO-、-COO-又は-OCO-で置換されていてもよい。)であり、より好ましくは、それぞれ独立して炭素原子数3~15の直鎖状のアルキル基(当該アルキル基中に存在する1個又は2個以上のメチレン基は、酸素原子が相互に直接結合しないものとして、それぞれ独立して、-O-、-CO-、-COO-又は-OCO-で置換されていてもよい。)である。
そこで、一般式(PC2-a)又は(PC2-b)中、A39及びA42は、好ましくは、それぞれ独立して水素原子又は炭素原子数1~7のアルキル基(当該アルキル基中に存在する1個又は2個以上のメチレン基は、酸素原子が相互に直接結合しないものとして、それぞれ独立して、-O-、-CO-、-COO-又は-OCO-で置換されていてもよい。)であり、より好ましくは、それぞれ独立して水素原子又は炭素原子数1~5のアルキル基(当該アルキル基中に存在する1個又は2個以上のメチレン基は、酸素原子が相互に直接結合しないものとして、それぞれ独立して、-O-、-CO-、-COO-又は-OCO-で置換されていてもよい。)であり、さらに好ましくは、それぞれ独立して水素原子又は炭素原子数1~3のアルキル基(当該アルキル基中に存在する1個又は2個以上のメチレン基は、酸素原子が相互に直接結合しないものとして、それぞれ独立して、-O-、-CO-、-COO-又は-OCO-で置換されていてもよい。)である。
一般式(PC2-e)又は(PC2-f)中、b及びcはそれぞれ独立して1~10の整数を表し、dは1~10の整数を表し、eは0~6の整数を表す。側鎖間の空間的な干渉を抑制する点から、dとeの少なくとも一方は、1~5の整数であることが好ましく、1~3の整数であることがより好ましい。
一般式(PC2-g)又は(PC2-h)中、f、g、h及びiはそれぞれ独立して1~10の整数を表す。側鎖間の空間的な干渉を抑制する点から、hとiの少なくとも一方は、1~5の整数であることが好ましく、1~3の整数であることがより好ましい。
例えば、一般式(PC2-a)において、A39及びA42が水素原子である化合物は、エポキシ基を複数有する化合物と、エポキシ基と反応し得る活性水素を有するアクリル酸やメタクリル酸等の重合性化合物とを反応させ、水酸基を有する重合性化合物を合成し、次に、飽和脂肪酸と反応させることにより得ることができる。
また、複数のエポキシ基を有する化合物と飽和脂肪酸とを反応させ、水酸基を有する化合物を合成し、次に水酸基と反応し得る基を有するアクリル酸塩化物等の重合性化合物とを反応させることによっても得ることができる。
また、一般式(PC2-a)のA37及びA43が炭素原子数3のアルキレン基(プロピレン基;-CH2CH2CH2-)である化合物は、例えば、オキセタン基の代わりにフラン基を複数有する化合物を用いることにより、前記と同様にして得ることができる。さらに、一般式(PC2-a)のA37及びA43が炭素原子数4であるアルキレン基(ブチレン基;-CH2CH2CH2CH2-)である化合物は、例えば、オキセタン基の代わりにピラン基を複数有する化合物を用いることにより得ることができる。
本発明の液晶・高分子複合材料に含まれる高分子の原料となる重合性化合物としては、アキラルな化合物又は実質的にラセミ体であることが好ましいが、キラルな重合性化合物を用いてもよい。キラルな重合性化合物としては、例えば、下記の一般式(VI-a)又は(VI-b)で表される重合性化合物を用いることができる。
一般式(VI-a)及び(VI-b)中、T21、T22、T23、T24は、それぞれ独立して、6員環構造を有する2価の基(6員環式2価基)を表す。当該6員環式2価基としては、下記の12種類の6員環式2価基が挙げられる。なお、下記一般式において、mは1~4の整数を示す。一般式(VI-a)又は(VI-b)で表される化合物としては、T21、T22、T23、T24は、それぞれ独立して、前記12種類の6員環式2価基のいずれかであることが好ましく、1,4-フェニレン基、又はトランス-1,4-シクロヘキシレン基がより好ましい。
一般式(VI-a)及び(VI-b)中、Z21は、不斉炭素原子を有し、かつ分枝鎖構造を含む炭素原子数3~20のアルキレン基を表す。
一般式(VI-a)及び(VI-b)中、Z22は、炭素原子数1~20のアルキレン基を表す。当該アルキレン基は、不斉炭素原子を含んでいてもよく、含まなくてもよい。
また、本発明の液晶・高分子複合材料に含まれる高分子のガラス転移温度は、-100℃~25℃であることが好ましい。そこで、重合反応後の高分子のガラス転移温度が当該範囲内となるように、原料として用いる重合性化合物の種類や組成を適宜調整することが好ましい。
さらに、本発明の液晶・高分子複合材料に含まれる高分子の原料としては、少なくとも1種類のメソゲン性重合性化合物と、少なくとも1種類の非メソゲン性重合性化合物とを用いることが好ましい。高分子の原料として、メソゲン性重合性化合物と非メソゲン性重合性化合物の両者を用いることにより、重合反応によって得られる液晶・高分子複合材料が光学的等方性相を発現する温度範囲をより広くすることができる。
本発明の液晶・高分子複合材料は、例えば、ネマチック液晶組成物と、全てのキラル化合物と、高分子の原料とする全ての重合性化合物とを混合した重合性化合物含有液晶組成物を調製した後、当該重合性化合物含有液晶組成物中の重合性基を有する化合物を重合させることによって製造することができる。
ネマチック液晶組成物とキラル化合物と重合性化合物を混合する順番は特に限定されるものではなく、全原料を実質的に同時に混合してもよく、予めネマチック液晶組成物とキラル化合物とが混合されている液晶組成物に、高分子の原料とする全ての重合性化合物を混合してもよい。当該重合性化合物含有液晶組成物中の全重合性化合物の総量は、用いる重合性化合物の種類、ネマチック液晶組成物の種類、キラル化合物の種類等を考慮して適宜決定することができるが、0.1~40質量%が好ましく、1~40質量%がより好ましく、1~25質量%がさらに好ましい。また、当該重合性化合物含有液晶組成物中のネマチック液晶組成物とキラル化合物との混合物の含有量は、60~95質量%であることが好ましく、60~90質量%がより好ましく、60~80質量%がさらに好ましい。
ジエトキシアセトフェノン、2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチル-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン、ベンジルジメチルケタール、1-(4-イソプロピルフェニル)-2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチルプロパン-1-オン、4-(2-ヒドロキシエトキシ)フェニル-(2-ヒドロキシ-2-プロピル)ケトン、1-ヒドロキシシクロヘキシル-フェニルケトン、2-メチル-2-モルホリノ(4-チオメチルフェニル)プロパン-1-オン、2-ベンジル-2-ジメチルアミノ-1-(4-モルホリノフェニル)-ブタノン等のアセトフェノン系;
ベンゾイン、ベンゾインイソプロピルエーテル、ベンゾインイソブチルエーテル等のベンゾイン系;
2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾイルジフェニルホスフィンオキサイド等のアシルホスフィンオキサイド系;
ベンジル、メチルフェニルグリオキシエステル系;
ベンゾフェノン、o-ベンゾイル安息香酸メチル、4-フェニルベンゾフェノン、4,4’-ジクロロベンゾフェノン、ヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、4-ベンゾイル-4’-メチル-ジフェニルサルファイド、アクリル化ベンゾフェノン、3,3’,4,4’-テトラ(t-ブチルパーオキシカルボニル)ベンゾフェノン、3,3’-ジメチル-4-メトキシベンゾフェノン等のベンゾフェノン系;
2-イソプロピルチオキサントン、2,4-ジメチルチオキサントン、2,4-ジエチルチオキサントン、2,4-ジクロロチオキサントン等のチオキサントン系;
ミヒラーケトン、4,4’-ジエチルアミノベンゾフェノン等のアミノベンゾフェノン系;
10-ブチル-2-クロロアクリドン、2-エチルアンスラキノン、9,10-フェナンスレンキノン、カンファーキノン等。
当該重合性化合物含有液晶組成物に含有させるラジカル重合開始剤としては、これらの化合物の中でも、ベンジルジメチルケタールが好ましい。
重合反応前の当該重合性化合物含有液晶組成物としては、光学的等方性相を発現し得ることが好ましく、ブルー相を発現し得ることがより好ましく、ブルー相IIIを発現し得ることがさらに好ましい。重合反応により形成された高分子によって、光学的等方性相が安定化する。つまり、重合反応により得られた液晶・高分子複合材料は、重合反応前の液晶組成物が光学的等方性相を発現する温度範囲よりもより広い温度幅で、光学的等方性相を発現できる。
当該重合性化合物含有液晶組成物の重合反応は、紫外線又は電子線等の活性エネルギー線を照射する方法や熱重合法等の公知の方法の中から、用いた重合性化合物の種類に応じて適宜選択される。本発明においては、加熱を必要とせず、室温で反応が進行することから活性エネルギー線を照射する方法が好ましく、中でも、操作が簡便なことから、紫外線等の光を照射する方法が好ましい。紫外線を使用する場合、偏光光源を用いてもよく、非偏光光源を用いてもよい。
ブルー相IIIを示す温度範囲がより広い液晶・高分子複合材料を製造するためには、原料として、分子内にシクロヘキサン骨格よりもベンゼン骨格を多く含む液晶性化合物の含有量が、ネマチック液晶組成物中の液晶性化合物全体の50質量%以上であるネマチック液晶組成物と、螺旋誘起力の温度依存性が負であるキラル化合物を用いることが好ましく、ネマチック液晶組成物全体に対して、分子内にシクロヘキサン骨格よりもベンゼン骨格を多く含む液晶性化合物の含有量が50質量%以上であり、かつ分子内に存在するシクロヘキサン骨格の数がベンゼン骨格の数以上である液晶性化合物の含有量が1~50質量%であるネマチック液晶組成物と、螺旋誘起力の温度依存性が負であるキラル化合物を用いることがより好ましい。特に、少なくとも-20℃~60℃の温度範囲でブルー相IIIを発現する液晶・高分子複合材料を製造するためには、一般式(II)で表される化合物を10~50質量%含有し、一般式(III)で表される化合物を50~90質量%含有するネマチック液晶組成物であり、かつ、当該組成物中の液晶性化合物全体に対して、分子内にシクロヘキサン骨格よりもベンゼン骨格を多く含む液晶性化合物の含有量が50質量%以上であり、分子内に存在するシクロヘキサン骨格の数がベンゼン骨格の数以上である液晶性化合物の含有量が1~50質量%であるネマチック液晶組成物と、螺旋誘起力の温度依存性が負であるキラル化合物を用いることが好ましい。
ブルー相、特にブルー相IIIを発現する重合性化合物含有液晶組成物を重合して得られた本発明の液晶・高分子複合材料は、ブルー相の持つ高速応答性を失うことなく、その発現温度範囲が従来になく拡張されているため、光学的等方性相で駆動される液晶光学素子の原料として好適である。
本発明におけるカラーフィルタは、ブラックマトリックス及び少なくともRGB三色画素部から構成されるが、RGB三色画素部は、色材として、R画素部中にジケトピロロピロール顔料及び/又はアニオン性赤色有機染料を、G画素部中にハロゲン化銅フタロシニアン顔料、フタロシアニン系緑色染料、フタロシアニン系青色染料とアゾ系黄色有機染料との混合物からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも一種を、B画素部中にε型銅フタロシニアン顔料及び/又はカチオン性青色有機染料を含有する。
後記する光硬化性組成物をガラス等の透明基板上に塗布する方法としては、例えば、スピンコート法、ロールコート法、インクジェット法等が挙げられる。
透明基板に塗布した光硬化性組成物の塗膜の乾燥条件は、各成分の種類、配合割合等によっても異なるが、通常、50~150℃で、1~15分間程度である。また、光硬化性組成物の光硬化に用いる光としては、200~500nmの波長範囲の紫外線、あるいは可視光を使用するのが好ましい。この波長範囲の光を発する各種光源が使用できる。
前記光硬化性組成物の製造方法としては、本発明のカラーフィルタ用染料及び/又は顔料組成物と、有機溶剤と分散剤とを必須成分として使用し、これらを混合し均一となる様に攪拌分散を行って、まずカラーフィルタの画素部を形成するための顔料分散液を調製してから、そこに、光硬化性化合物と、必要に応じて熱可塑性樹脂や光重合開始剤等を加えて前記光硬化性組成物とする方法が一般的である。
光硬化性組成物の調製に使用する熱可塑性樹脂としては、例えば、ウレタン系樹脂、アクリル系樹脂、ポリアミド系樹脂、ポリイミド系樹脂、スチレンマレイン酸系樹脂、スチレン無水マレイン酸系樹脂等が挙げられる。
光重合開始剤の配合率は、特に限定されるものではないが、質量基準で、光重合性あるいは光硬化性官能基を有する化合物に対して0.1~30%の範囲が好ましい。0.1%未満では、光硬化時の感光度が低下する傾向にあり、30%を超えると、顔料分散レジストの塗膜を乾燥させたときに、光重合開始剤の結晶が析出して塗膜物性の劣化を引き起こすことがある。
フォトリソグラフィー法によるカラーフィルタ画素部の製造方法について詳記したが、本発明のカラーフィルタ用顔料組成物を使用して調製されたカラーフィタ画素部は、その他の電着法、転写法、ミセル電解法、PVED(PhotovoltaicElectrodeposition)法、インクジェット法、反転印刷法、熱硬化法等の方法で各色画素部を形成して、カラーフィルタを製造してもよい。
本発明の液晶表示装置において、第一の基板と、第二の基板上の液晶組成物と接する面には液晶組成物を配向させるための配向膜を設けることができる。配向膜を必要とする液晶表示装置においてはカラーフィルタと液晶層間に配向膜を配置するものであるが、配向膜の膜厚が厚いものでも100nm以下と薄く、カラーフィルタを構成する顔料等の色素と液晶層を構成する液晶化合物との相互作用を完全に遮断するものでは無い。
又、配向膜を用いない液晶表示装置においては、カラーフィルタを構成する顔料等の色素と液晶層を構成する液晶化合物との相互作用はより大きくなる。
配向膜は、基板上に前記配向膜材料をスピンコート法などの方法により塗布して樹脂膜を形成することが一般的であるが、一軸延伸法、ラングミュア・ブロジェット法等を用いることもできる。
本発明の液晶表示装置において、透明電極の材料としては、導電性の金属酸化物を用いることができ、金属酸化物としては酸化インジウム(In2O3)、酸化スズ(SnO2)、酸化亜鉛(ZnO)、酸化インジウムスズ(In2O3―SnO2)、酸化インジウム亜鉛(In2O3―ZnO)、酸化インジウム・ガリウム・亜鉛(IGZO)、ニオブ添加二酸化チタン(Ti1-xNbxO2)、フッ素ドープ酸化スズ、グラフェン又は金属ナノワイヤー等が使用できるが、酸化亜鉛(ZnO)、酸化インジウムスズ(In2O3―SnO2)、酸化インジウム・ガリウム・亜鉛(IGZO)、又は酸化インジウム亜鉛(In2O3―ZnO)が好ましい。これらの透明導電膜のパターニングには、フォト・エッチング法やマスクを用いる方法などを使用することができる。
液晶表示装置はフレキシブル表示素子でもよく、その場合の電極基板は、プラスチック基板や薄膜ガラス基板等のフレキシブル基板を使用することが好ましい。電極としては、グラフェン(炭素の単原子層からなるシート)や有機半導体など、フレキシブルな電極材料を用いることが好ましい。
液晶表示装置は、偏光方式、視差バリア方式、インテグラルイメージング方式等のスペース分割、分光方式やアナグリフ等の波長分割、FPSモード等により、3D表示を行うことも可能である。
表示方式としては、基板に対して略水平方向に電界を加えて屈折率楕円体を生じさせる複屈折モードとして利用することが可能で、IPS(In-Plaine Switching)モードとFFS(Fringe Field Switching)モードなどが代表的である。IPSモードとしては、S-IPS(Super IPS)、AS-IPS(Advanced Super IPS)、IPS-Pro(IPS-Provectus)など、櫛型電極の構造を屈曲させることによって、基板に対して略水平方向に印加する横電界の向きを制御することは、駆動電圧の低下、高画質化、高輝度化、超高輝度化などの観点から好ましい。櫛形電極は、金属電極を用いることが可能であるが、電極部分の光の利用効率を上げるためには、ITO、酸化インジウム・ガリウム・亜鉛(IGZO)、グラフェンなどの透明電極を用いることが好ましい。また、FFSモードとしては、AFFS(Advanced Fringe Field Switching)を用いることで、画素内のブラックマトリックスがなくなることで透過率を高め、広い視野角、高コントラスト比、低消費電力の点で好ましい。また、基板に対して垂直電界を印加し、プリズムで光路を斜めにすることにより表示を可能とするVFSモード(Vertical-Field-Switching)にも利用可能である。
高速応答性のためには、オーバードライブ機能(階調を表現する際の電圧を、立ち上がり時に高く、立ち下がり時は低くする)を用いることが好ましい。
電離放射線硬化性樹脂としては、多価アルコールのアクリル酸またはメタクリル酸エステルのような多官能性のアクリレート、ジイソシアネートと多価アルコール及びアクリル酸またはメタクリル酸のヒドロキシエステル等から合成されるような多官能のウレタンアクリレート等が挙げられる。また、これらの他にも、アクリレート系の官能基を有するポリエーテル樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、アルキッド樹脂、スピロアセタール樹脂、ポリブタジエン樹脂、ポリチオールポリエン樹脂等も使用することができる。上記のうち、表面硬度を向上させることを考慮すると、多官能(メタ)アクリルモノマーを用いることが好ましい。ここで、多官能(メタ)アクリルモノマーとしては、1分子中に2個以上のアルコール性水酸基を有する多価アルコールの該水酸基が、2個以上の(メタ)アクリル酸のエステル化物となっている化合物が好ましい。その他には、アクリル系樹脂骨格に反応性のアクリル基が結合されたものや、ポリエステルアクリレート、ウレタンアクリレート、エポキシアクリレートおよびポリエーテルアクリレートなどが挙げられる。また、メラミンやイソシアヌル酸などの剛直な骨格にアクリル基を結合したものなども用いることができる。また、本発明の多官能(メタ)アクリルモノマーは、オリゴマーであっても構わない。市販されている多官能アクリル系モノマーとしては、三菱レイヨン株式会社;(商品名“ダイヤビーム”シリーズなど)、ナガセケムテックス株式会社;(商品名“デナコール”シリーズなど)、新中村化学工業株式会社;(商品名“NKエステル”シリーズなど)、DIC株式会社;(商品名“UNIDIC”シリーズなど)、東亜合成株式会社;(商品名“アロニックス”シリーズなど)、日本油脂株式会社;(商品名“ブレンマー”シリーズなど)、日本化薬株式会社;(商品名“KAYARAD”シリーズなど)、共栄社化学株式会社;(商品名“ライトエステル”シリーズ、“ライトアクリレート”シリーズなど)などの製品を利用することができる。
耐擦傷性の点では、自己修復機能をもつフィルムなどを付与することも好ましく、傷をつけてもフィルムの弾性によって自己修復することが好ましく、例えば「マジックフィルム」(サンクレスト)などが付与できる。
防指紋性に対しては、脂質をはじく性質をもった化合物をフィルム添加することが好ましく、パーフルオロポリエーテルアクリレート化合物などのフッ素置換あるいはパーフルオロ基をもつ化合物をフィルムに添加することが好ましい。あるいは「クリアタッチ」(日油化学)、消指紋(登録商標)Film(ツジデン)などの機能性フィルムを表示素子に付与することもできる。
本発明の表示素子が具備する機能としては、3軸ジャイロ、加速度センサー、環境光センサー、Wi-Fi、3Gなどの携帯電話通信、デジタルコンパス、GPS機能を有することが好ましい。
液晶組成物の物性として、以下のように表す。
dgap:セルの第一基板と第二基板のギャップ(μm)
VHR :電圧保持率(%)
(セル厚5μmのセルに液晶組成物を注入し、5V印加、フレームタイム200ms、パルス幅1msの条件で測定した時の測定電圧と初期印加電圧との比を%で表した値。)
液晶表示装置の焼き付き評価は、表示エリア内に所定の固定パターンを1000時間表示させた後に、全画面均一な表示を行ったときの固定パターンの残像のレベルを目視にて以下の4段階評価で行った。
◎残像無し
○残像ごく僅かに有るも許容できるレベル
△残像有り許容できないレベル
×残像有りかなり劣悪
[着色組成物の調製]
[赤色染料着色組成物1]
赤色染料1(C.I.Solvent Red 124)10部をポリビンに入れ、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート55部、0.3-0.4mmφセプルビーズを加え、ペイントコンディショナー(東洋精機株式会社製)で4時間分散した後、5μmのフィルタで濾過し染料着色液を得た。 この染料着色液75.00部とポリエステルアクリレート樹脂(アロニックス(商標名)M7100、東亜合成化学工業株式会社製)5.50部、ジぺンタエリストールヘキサアクリレート(KAYARAD(商標名)DPHA、日本化薬株式会社製)5.00部、ベンゾフェノン(KAYACURE(商標名)BP-100、日本化薬株式会社製)1.00部、ユーカーエステルEEP13.5部を分散撹拌機で撹拌し、孔径1.0μmのフィルタで濾過し、赤色染料着色組成物1を得た。
上記赤色染料着色組成物1の赤色染料1 10部に代え、赤色染料1(C.I.Solvent Red 124)8部と黄色染料2(C.I.Solvent Yellow 21)2部を用いて、上記と同様にして、赤色染料着色組成物2を得た。
上記赤色染料着色組成物1の赤色染料1 10部に代え、赤色染料2(C.I.Solvent Red 1)10部を用いて、上記と同様にして、赤色染料着色組成物3を得た。
上記赤色染料着色組成物1の赤色染料1 10部に代え、青色染料1(C.I.Solvent Blue 67)3部と黄色染料1(C.I.Solvent Yellow 162)7部を用いて、上記と同様にして、緑色染料着色組成物1を得た。
上記緑色染料着色組成物1の黄色染料1 7部を、黄色染料1(C.I.Solvent Yellow 162)4部と黄色染料3(C.I.Solvent Yellow 82)3部に代えて、上記と同様にして、緑色染料着色組成物2を得た。
上記緑色染料着色組成物1の青色染料1 3部と黄色染料1 7部に代え緑色染料1(C.I.Solvent Green 7)10部を用いて、上記と同様にして、緑色染料着色組成物3を得た。
上記赤色染料着色組成物1の赤色染料1 10部に代え、青色染料1(C.I.Solvent Blue 7)10部を用いて、上記と同様にして、青色染料着色組成物1を得た。
[青色染料着色組成物2]
上記青色染料着色組成物1の青色染料1 10部に代え、青色染料1(C.I.Solvent Blue 7)7部、紫色染料1(C.I.Basic Violet 10)3部を用いて、上記と同様にして、青色染料着色組成物2を得た。
上記青色染料着色組成物2の青色染料1 7部、紫色染料1 3部に代え、青色染料2(C.I.Solvent Blue 12)10部を用いて、上記と同様にして、青色染料着色組成物3を得た。
上記赤色染料着色組成物1の赤色染料1 10部に代え、黄色染料2(C.I.Solvent Yellow 21)10部を用いて、上記と同様にして、黄色染料着色組成物1を得た。
上記黄色染料着色組成物1の黄色染料2 10部に代え、黄色染料4(C.I.Solvent Yellow 2)10部を用いて、上記と同様にして、黄色染料着色組成物2を得た。
赤色顔料1(C.I.PigmentRed254、BASF社製「IRGAPHOR RED BT-CF」)10部をポリビンに入れ、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート55部、ディスパービックLPN21116(ビックケミー株式会社製)7.0部、0.3-0.4mmφセプルビーズを加え、ペイントコンディショナー(東洋精機株式会社製)で4時間分散した後、5μmのフィルタで濾過し顔料分散液を得た。 この顔料分散液75.00部とポリエステルアクリレート樹脂(アロニックス(商標名)M7100、東亜合成化学工業株式会社製)5.50部、ジぺンタエリストールヘキサアクリレート(KAYARAD(商標名)DPHA、日本化薬株式会社製)5.00部、ベンゾフェノン(KAYACURE(商標名)BP-100、日本化薬株式会社製)1.00部、ユーカーエステルEEP13.5部を分散撹拌機で撹拌し、孔径1.0μmのフィルタで濾過し、赤色顔料着色組成物1を得た。
上記赤色顔料着色組1成物の赤色顔料1 10部に代え、赤色顔料1 6部と赤色顔料2(C.I.Pigment Red 177 DIC株式会社製FASTOGEN SUPER RED アTY-TR)2部、黄色顔料2(C.I.Pigment Yellow 139)2部を用いて、上記と同様にして、赤色顔料着色組成物2を得た。
上記赤色顔料着色組成物1の赤色顔料1 10部に代え、緑色顔料1(C.I.Pigment Green 36、DIC株式会社製「FASTOGEN GREEN 2YK-CF」)6部と黄色顔料1(C.I.Pigment Yellow 150、BAYER社製FANCHON FAST YELLOW E4GN)4部を用いて、上記と同様にして、緑色顔料着色組成物1を得た。
上記緑色顔料着色組成物1の緑色顔料1 6部、黄色顔料1 4部に代え、緑色顔料2(C.I.Pigment Green 7、DIC株式会社製FASTOGEN GREEN S)4部と黄色顔料3(C.I.Pigment YELLOW 138)6部を用いて、上記と同様にして、緑色顔料着色組成物2を得た。
上記赤色顔料着色組成物1の赤色顔料1 10部に代え、青色顔料1(C.I.Pigment Blue 15:6、DIC株式会社製「FASTOGEN BLUE EP-210」)9部と紫色顔料1(C.I.Pigment VIOLET 23)1部を用いて、上記と同様にして、青色顔料着色組成物1を得た。
上記青色顔料着色組成物1の紫色顔料1 1部に代え、紫色染料1(C.I.Basic Violet 10)1部を用いて、上記と同様にして、青色顔料染料着色組成物2を得た。
上記赤色顔料着色組1成物の赤色顔料1 10部に代え、黄色顔料1(C.I.Pigment Yellow 150、BAYER社製FANCHON FAST YELLOW E4GN)10部を用いて、上記と同様にして、黄色顔料着色組成物1を得た。
予めブラックマトリックスが形成されてあるガラス基板に、赤色着色組成物をスピンコートにより膜厚2μmとなるように塗布した。70℃で20分間乾燥の後、超高圧水銀ランプを備えた露光機にて紫外線をフォトマスクを介してストライプ状のパターン露光をした。アルカリ現像液にて90秒間スプレー現像、イオン交換水で洗浄し、風乾した。さらに、クリーンオーブン中で、230℃で30分間ポストベークを行い、ストライプ状の着色層である赤色画素を透明基板上に形成した。
次に、緑色着色組成物も同様にスピンコートにて膜厚が2μmとなるように塗布。乾燥後、露光機にてストライプ状の着色層を前述の赤色画素とはずらした場所に露光し現像することで、前述赤色画素と隣接した緑色画素を形成した。
次に、青色着色組成物についても同様にスピンコートにて膜厚2μmで赤色画素、緑色画素と隣接した青色画素を形成した。これで、透明基板上に赤、緑、青の3色のストライプ状の画素を持つカラーフィルタが得られた。
必要に応じて、黄色着色組成物についても、同様にスピンコートにて膜厚2μmで赤色画素、緑色画素と隣接した青色画素を形成した。これで、透明基板上に赤、緑、青、黄の4色のストライプ状の画素を持つカラーフィルタが得られた。
表1に示す染料着色組成物又は顔料着色組成物を用い、カラーフィルタ1~4及び比較カラーフィルタ1を作成した。
第一の基板上(電極は非付与)へ、表1に示すカラーフィルタ1~4を用いて、ストライプ状の画素を持つカラーフィルタを形成した。第二の基板上へ、二つの電極が交互に配置された櫛型電極構造(電極間距離=5μm)を形成した。配向処理が施されていない第一及び第二の基板を各々用いて、dgap=5μmを保持したセルを構成した。この基板間にキラル液晶含有材料1を真空注入法で注入し、実施例1~4の液晶表示装置を作製した。
キラル液晶含有材料1は、ネマチック液晶組成物LC-1(95.0%)とキラル化合物CH-1(5.0%)とを配合して調製した。ネマチック液晶組成物LC-1は、56.5℃でネマチック相からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。また、複屈折(Δn)は0.164(20℃、589nmで測定)であった。キラル液晶含有材料1は、加熱において36℃でコレステリック相からブルー相(キュービック)へ転移し、43℃でブルー相(キュービック)からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。
偏光顕微鏡で観察したところ、ブルー相(キュービック)を示す温度でセルを回転させても完全な暗視野を維持し、変化が無くアイソトロピック相と同等の黒さが得られており、配向欠陥による光抜けは観察されなかった。
得られた液晶表示装置のVHRを、ブルー相(キュービック)を示す温度で測定した。また、得られた液晶表示装置の焼き付き評価を行った。その結果を表2に示す。
第一の基板上(電極は非付与)へ、表1に示すカラーフィルタ1~4を用いて、ストライプ状の画素を持つカラーフィルタを形成した。第二の基板上へ、二つの電極が交互に配置された櫛型電極構造(電極間距離=5μm)を形成した。配向処理が施されていない第一及び第二の基板を各々用いて、dgap=5μmを保持したセルを構成した。この基板間にキラル液晶含有材料2を真空注入法で注入し、実施例5~8の液晶表示装置を作製した。
キラル液晶含有材料2は、ネマチック液晶組成物LC-2(95.7%)とキラル化合物CH-1(4.3%)とを配合して調製した。ネマチック液晶組成物LC-2は、66.6℃でネマチック相からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。また、複屈折(Δn)は0.148(20℃、589nmで測定)であった。キラル液晶含有材料2は、加熱において50℃でコレステリック相からブルー相(キュービック)へ転移し、55℃でブルー相(キュービック)からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。
偏光顕微鏡で観察したところ、ブルー相(キュービック)を示す温度でセルを回転させても完全な暗視野を維持し、変化が無くアイソトロピック相と同等の黒さが得られており、配向欠陥による光抜けは観察されなかった。
得られた液晶表示装置のVHRを、ブルー相(キュービック)を示す温度で測定した。また、得られた液晶表示装置の焼き付き評価を行った。その結果を表3に示す。
第一の基板上(電極は非付与)へ、表1に示すカラーフィルタ1~4を用いて、ストライプ状の画素を持つカラーフィルタを形成した。第二の基板上へ、二つの電極が交互に配置された櫛型電極構造(電極間距離=5μm)を形成した。配向処理が施されていない第一及び第二の基板を各々用いて、dgap=5μmを保持したセルを構成した。この基板間にキラル液晶含有材料3を真空注入法で注入し、実施例9~12の液晶表示装置を作成した。
キラル液晶含有材料3は、ネマチック液晶組成物LC-3(88.0%)とキラル化合物CH-2(12.0%)とを配合して調製した。ネマチック液晶組成物LC-3は、78.7℃でネマチック相からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。また、複屈折(Δn)は0.139(25℃、589nmで測定)、誘電率異方性(Δε)は16.4(25℃で測定)であった。液晶組成物3は、加熱において59℃でコレステリック相からブルー相(キュービック)へ転移し、64.3℃でブルー相(キュービック)からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。
偏光顕微鏡で観察したところ、ブルー相(キュービック)を示す温度でセルを回転させても完全な暗視野を維持し、変化が無くアイソトロピック相と同等の黒さが得られており、配向欠陥による光抜けは観察されなかった。
得られた液晶表示装置のVHRを、ブルー相(キュービック)を示す温度で測定した。また、得られた液晶表示装置の焼き付き評価を行った。その結果を表4に示す。
第一の基板上(電極は非付与)へ、表1に示すカラーフィルタ1~4を用いて、ストライプ状の画素を持つカラーフィルタを形成した。第二の基板上へ、二つの電極が交互に配置された櫛型電極構造(電極間距離=5μm)を形成した。配向処理が施されていない第一及び第二の基板を各々用いて、dgap=5μmを保持したセルを構成した。この基板間にキラル液晶含有材料4を真空注入法で注入し、実施例13~16の液晶表示装置を作成した。
キラル液晶含有材料4は、ネマチック液晶組成物LC-4(95.5%)とキラル化合物CH-3(4.5%)とを配合して調製した。ネマチック液晶組成物LC-4は、83.1℃でネマチック相からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。キラル液晶含有材料4は、加熱において75.1℃でブルー相(キュービック)からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。
偏光顕微鏡で観察したところ、ブルー相(キュービック)を示す温度でセルを回転させても完全な暗視野を維持し、変化が無くアイソトロピック相と同等の黒さが得られており、配向欠陥による光抜けは観察されなかった。
得られた液晶表示装置のVHRを、ブルー相(キュービック)を示す温度で測定した。また、得られた液晶表示装置の焼き付き評価を行った。その結果を表5に示す。
第一の基板上(電極は非付与)へ、表1に示すカラーフィルタ1~4を用いて、ストライプ状の画素を持つカラーフィルタを形成した。第二の基板上へ、二つの電極が交互に配置された櫛型電極構造(電極間距離=5μm)を形成した。配向処理が施されていない第一及び第二の基板を各々用いて、dgap=5μmを保持したセルを構成した。この基板間にキラル液晶含有材料5を真空注入法で注入し、実施例17~20の液晶表示装置を作成した。
キラル液晶含有材料5は、ネマチック液晶組成物LC-5(94.0%)とキラル化合物CH-3(6.0%)とを配合して調製した。ネマチック液晶組成物LC-5は、82.8℃でネマチック相からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。また、複屈折(Δn)は0.180(25℃、589nmで測定)であった。キラル液晶含有材料5は、加熱において72.2℃でブルー相(キュービック)からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。
偏光顕微鏡で観察したところ、ブルー相(キュービック)を示す温度でセルを回転させても完全な暗視野を維持し、変化が無くアイソトロピック相と同等の黒さが得られており、配向欠陥による光抜けは観察されなかった。
得られた液晶表示装置のVHRを、ブルー相(キュービック)を示す温度で測定した。また、得られた液晶表示装置の焼き付き評価を行った。その結果を表6に示す。
第一の基板上(電極は非付与)へ、表1に示すカラーフィルタ1~4を用いて、ストライプ状の画素を持つカラーフィルタを形成した。第二の基板上へ、二つの電極が交互に配置された櫛型電極構造(電極間距離=5μm)を形成した。配向処理が施されていない第一及び第二の基板を各々用いて、dgap=5μmを保持したセルを構成した。この基板間にキラル液晶含有材料6を真空注入法で注入し、実施例21~24の液晶表示装置を作成した。
キラル液晶含有材料6は、ネマチック液晶組成物LC-6(88.0%)とキラル化合物CH-2(12.0%)とを配合して調製した。ネマチック液晶組成物LC-6は、73.0℃でネマチック相からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。また、複屈折(Δn)は0.128(25℃、589nmで測定)、誘電率異方性(Δε)は-4.0(25℃で測定)であった。キラル液晶含有材料6は、加熱において54℃でコレステリック相からブルー相(キュービック)へ転移し、58.6℃でブルー相(キュービック)からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。
偏光顕微鏡で観察したところ、ブルー相(キュービック)を示す温度でセルを回転させても完全な暗視野を維持し、変化が無くアイソトロピック相と同等の黒さが得られており、配向欠陥による光抜けは観察されなかった。
得られた液晶表示装置のVHRを、ブルー相(キュービック)を示す温度で測定した。また、得られた液晶表示装置の焼き付き評価を行った。その結果を表7に示す。
第一の基板上(電極は非付与)へ、表1に示すカラーフィルタ1~4を用いて、ストライプ状の画素を持つカラーフィルタを形成した。第二の基板上へ、二つの電極が交互に配置された櫛型電極構造(電極間距離=5μm)を形成した。配向処理が施されていない第一及び第二の基板を各々用いて、dgap=5μmを保持したセルを構成した。この基板間にキラル液晶含有材料7を真空注入法で注入し、実施例25~28の液晶表示装置を作製した。
キラル液晶含有材料7は、ネマチック液晶組成物LC-7(80.0%)とキラル化合物CH-4(20.0%)とを配合して調製した。ネマチック液晶組成物LC-7は、-29℃からネマチック相を示し、101.3℃でネマチック相からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。また、複屈折(Δn)は0.239(25℃、589nmで測定)、誘電率異方性(Δε)は27.75(25℃で測定)であった。キラル液晶含有材料7は、加熱において61.3℃でコレステリック相からブルー相(キュービック)に転移し、64.9℃でブルー相(キュービック)からブルー相(アモルファス)に転移し、69.6℃でブルー相(アモルファス)からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。
偏光顕微鏡で観察したところ、ブルー相(アモルファス)を示す温度でセルを回転させても完全な暗視野を維持し、変化が無くアイソトロピック相と同等の黒さが得られており、配向欠陥による光抜けは観察されなかった。
得られた液晶表示装置のVHRを、ブルー相(アモルファス)を示す温度で測定した。また、得られた液晶表示装置の焼き付き評価を行った。その結果を表8に示す。
表1に示す比較カラーフィルタ1を用いた以外は、実施例1~4と同様にして比較例1の液晶表示装置を作製した。また表1に示す比較カラーフィルタ1を用いた以外は、実施例5~8と同様にして比較例2の液晶表示装置を作製した。また表1に示す比較カラーフィルタ1を用いた以外は、実施例9~12と同様にして比較例3の液晶表示装置を作製した。また表1に示す比較カラーフィルタ1を用いた以外は、実施例13~16と同様にして比較例4の液晶表示装置を作製した。また表1に示す比較カラーフィルタ1を用いた以外は、実施例17~20と同様にして比較例5の液晶表示装置を作製した。また表1に示す比較カラーフィルタ1を用いた以外は、実施例21~24と同様にして比較例6の液晶表示装置を作製した。さらに表1に示す比較カラーフィルタ1を用いた以外は、実施例25~28と同様にして比較例7の液晶表示装置を作製した。
得られた液晶表示装置のVHRを測定した。また、得られた液晶表示装置の焼き付き評価を行った。その結果を表9及び表10に示す。
比較キラル液晶含有材料1を用いた以外は、実施例1~4と同様にして比較例8~11の液晶表示装置を作製した。
比較キラル液晶含有材料1は、ネマチック液晶組成物LC-8(95.0%)とキラル化合物CH-5(5.0%)とを配合して調製した。ネマチック液晶組成物LC-8は、35℃でネマチック相からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。また、複屈折(Δn)は0.184(20℃、589nmで測定)、誘電率異方性(Δε)は11.0(26℃で測定)であった。比較キラル液晶含有材料1は、加熱において30℃でコレステリック相からブルー相を示すことなくアイソトロピック相へ転移した。
得られた液晶表示装置のVHRを、コレステリック相を示す温度である25℃で測定した。また、得られた液晶表示装置の焼き付き評価を行った。その結果を表11に示す。
第一の基板上(電極は非付与)へ、表1に示すカラーフィルタ1~4を用いて、ストライプ状の画素を持つカラーフィルタを形成した。第二の基板上へ、二つの電極が交互に配置された櫛型電極構造(電極間距離=5μm)を形成した。配向処理が施されていない第一及び第二の基板を各々用いて、dgap=5μmを保持したセルを構成した。この基板間にキラル液晶含有材料8を真空注入法で注入した。
キラル液晶含有組成物8は、キラル液晶含有材料1 88.8%と下記モノマー混合物1 11.2%とを配合して調製した。キラル液晶含有材料8は、加熱において14℃でコレステリック相からブルー相(キュービック)へ転移し、20.6℃でブルー相(キュービック)からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。メタルハライドランプを光源とし、紫外線カットフィルターL-37(ホーヤ カンデオ オプトロニクス社製)を介して、紫外光(中心波長365nmでの照度は5mW/cm2)を、キラル液晶含有材料8を挟持した液晶表示装置のカラーフィルタの形成していない第二の基板側から、ブルー相(キュービック)を示す温度で300秒間照射した。重合性化合物を重合させることにより、実施例29~32の液晶・高分子複合材料1からなる液晶表示装置を作製した。
室温において偏光顕微鏡で観察したところ、セルを回転させても完全な暗視野を維持し、変化が無くアイソトロピック相と同等の黒さが得られており、配向欠陥による光抜けは観察されず、ブルー相(キュービック)であることを確認した。
得られた液晶表示装置のVHRを、ブルー相(キュービック)を示す温度で測定した。また、得られた液晶表示装置の焼き付き評価を行った。その結果を表12に示す。
第一の基板上(電極は非付与)へ、表1に示すカラーフィルタ1~4を用いて、ストライプ状の画素を持つカラーフィルタを形成した。第二の基板上へ、二つの電極が交互に配置された櫛型電極構造(電極間距離=5μm)を形成した。配向処理が施されていない第一及び第二の基板を各々用いて、dgap=5μmを保持したセルを構成した。この基板間にキラル液晶含有材料9を真空注入法で注入した。
キラル液晶含有材料9は、キラル液晶含有材料2 88.8%と上記モノマー混合物1 11.2%とを配合して調製した。キラル液晶含有材料9は、加熱において28℃でコレステリック相からブルー相(キュービック)へ転移し、32.6℃でブルー相(キュービック)からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。メタルハライドランプを光源とし、紫外線カットフィルターL-37(ホーヤ カンデオ オプトロニクス社製)を介して、紫外光(中心波長365nmでの照度は5mW/cm2)を、キラル液晶含有材料9を挟持した液晶表示装置のカラーフィルタの形成していない第二の基板側から、ブルー相(キュービック)を示す温度で300秒間照射した。重合性化合物を重合させることにより、実施例33~36の液晶・高分子複合材料2からなる液晶表示装置を作製した。
室温において偏光顕微鏡で観察したところ、セルを回転させても完全な暗視野を維持し、変化が無く等方アイソトロピック相と同等の黒さが得られており、配向欠陥による光抜けは観察されず、ブルー相(キュービック)であることを確認した。
得られた液晶表示装置のVHRを、ブルー相(キュービック)を示す温度で測定した。また、得られた液晶表示装置の焼き付き評価を行った。その結果を表13に示す。
第一の基板上(電極は非付与)へ、表1に示すカラーフィルタ1~4を用いて、ストライプ状の画素を持つカラーフィルタを形成した。第二の基板上へ、二つの電極が交互に配置された櫛型電極構造(電極間距離=5μm)を形成した。配向処理が施されていない第一及び第二の基板を各々用いて、dgap=5μmを保持したセルを構成した。この基板間にキラル液晶含有材料10を真空注入法で注入した。
キラル液晶含有材料10は、キラル液晶含有材料3 87.1%と下記モノマー混合物2 12.9%とを配合して調製した。キラル液晶含有材料10は、加熱において44℃でコレステリック相からブルー相(キュービック)へ転移し、49.6℃でブルー相(キュービック)からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。
メタルハライドランプを光源とし、紫外線カットフィルターL-37(ホーヤ カンデオ オプトロニクス社製)を介して、紫外光(中心波長365nmでの照度は5mW/cm2)を、キラル液晶含有材料10を挟持した液晶表示装置のカラーフィルタの形成していない第二の基板側から、透明点の直上である49.7℃で300秒間照射した。重合性化合物を重合させることにより、実施例37~40の液晶・高分子複合材料3からなる液晶表示装置を作製した。
室温において偏光顕微鏡で観察したところ、セルを回転させても完全な暗視野を維持し、変化が無くアイソトロピック相と同等の黒さが得られており、配向欠陥による光抜けは観察されず、ブルー相(キュービック)であることを確認した。
得られた液晶表示装置のVHRを、ブルー相(キュービック)を示す温度で測定した。また、得られた液晶表示装置の焼き付き評価を行った。その結果を表14に示す。
第一の基板上(電極は非付与)へ、表1に示すカラーフィルタ1~4を用いて、ストライプ状の画素を持つカラーフィルタを形成した。第二の基板上へ、二つの電極が交互に配置された櫛型電極構造(電極間距離=5μm)を形成した。配向処理が施されていない第一及び第二の基板を各々用いて、dgap=5μmを保持したセルを構成した。この基板間にキラル液晶含有材料11を真空注入法で注入した。
キラル液晶含有材料11は、キラル液晶含有材料4 79.4%と下記モノマー混合物3 20.6%とを配合して調製した。キラル液晶含有材料11は、加熱において62.9℃でブルー相(キュービック)からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。
メタルハライドランプを光源とし、紫外線カットフィルターL-37(ホーヤ カンデオ オプトロニクス社製)を介して、紫外光(中心波長365nmでの照度は5mW/cm2)を、キラル液晶含有材料11を挟持した液晶表示装置のカラーフィルタの形成していない第二の基板側から、透明点直上である63.0℃で300秒間照射した。重合性化合物を重合させることにより、実施例41~44の液晶・高分子複合材料4からなる液晶表示装置を作製した。
室温において偏光顕微鏡で観察したところ、セルを回転させても完全な暗視野を維持し、変化が無くアイソトロピック相と同等の黒さが得られており、配向欠陥による光抜けは観察されず、ブルー相(キュービック)であることを確認した。
得られた液晶表示装置のVHRを、ブルー相(キュービック)を示す温度で測定した。また、得られた液晶表示装置の焼き付き評価を行った。その結果を表15に示す。
第一の基板上(電極は非付与)へ、表1に示すカラーフィルタ1~4を用いて、ストライプ状の画素を持つカラーフィルタを形成した。第二の基板上へ、二つの電極が交互に配置された櫛型電極構造(電極間距離=5μm)を形成した。配向処理が施されていない第一及び第二の基板を各々用いて、dgap=5μmを保持したセルを構成した。この基板間にキラル液晶含有材料12を真空注入法で注入した。
キラル液晶含有材料12は、キラル液晶含有材料5 79.4%と上記モノマー混合物3 20.6%とを配合して調製した。キラル液晶含有材料12は、加熱において67.9℃でブルー相(キュービック)からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。
メタルハライドランプを光源とし、紫外線カットフィルターL-37(ホーヤ カンデオ オプトロニクス社製)を介して、紫外光(中心波長365nmでの照度は5mW/cm2)を、キラル液晶含有材料12を挟持した液晶表示装置のカラーフィルタの形成していない第二の基板側から、透明点直上である68.0℃で300秒間照射した。重合性化合物を重合させることにより、実施例45~48の液晶・高分子複合材料5からなる液晶表示装置を作製した。
室温において偏光顕微鏡で観察したところ、セルを回転させても完全な暗視野を維持し、変化が無くアイソトロピック相と同等の黒さが得られており、配向欠陥による光抜けは観察されず、ブルー相(キュービック)であることを確認した。
得られた液晶表示装置のVHRを、ブルー相(キュービック)を示す温度で測定した。また、得られた液晶表示装置の焼き付き評価を行った。その結果を表16に示す。
第一の基板上(電極は非付与)へ、表1に示すカラーフィルタ1~4を用いて、ストライプ状の画素を持つカラーフィルタを形成した。第二の基板上へ、二つの電極が交互に配置された櫛型電極構造(電極間距離=5μm)を形成した。配向処理が施されていない第一及び第二の基板を各々用いて、dgap=5μmを保持したセルを構成した。この基板間にキラル液晶含有材料13を真空注入法で注入した。
キラル液晶含有材料13は、キラル液晶含有材料6 87.1%と上記モノマー混合物2 12.9%とを配合して調製した。キラル液晶含有材料13は、加熱において38℃でコレステリック相からブルー相(キュービック)へ転移し、43.9℃でブルー相(キュービック)からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。
メタルハライドランプを光源とし、紫外線カットフィルターL-37(ホーヤ カンデオ オプトロニクス社製)を介して、紫外光(中心波長365nmでの照度は5mW/cm2)を、キラル液晶含有材料13を挟持した液晶表示装置のカラーフィルタの形成していない第二の基板側から、透明点の直上である44.0℃で300秒間照射した。重合性化合物を重合させることにより、実施例49~52の液晶・高分子複合材料6からなる液晶表示装置を作製した。
室温において偏光顕微鏡で観察したところ、セルを回転させても完全な暗視野を維持し、変化が無くアイソトロピック相と同等の黒さが得られており、配向欠陥による光抜けは観察されず、ブルー相(キュービック)であることを確認した。
得られた液晶表示装置のVHRを、ブルー相(キュービック)を示す温度で測定した。また、得られた液晶表示装置の焼き付き評価を行った。その結果を表17に示す。
第一の基板上(電極は非付与)へ、表1に示すカラーフィルタ1~4を用いて、ストライプ状の画素を持つカラーフィルタを形成した。第二の基板上へ、二つの電極が交互に配置された櫛型電極構造(電極間距離=5μm)を形成した。配向処理が施されていない第一及び第二の基板を各々用いて、dgap=5μmを保持したセルを構成した。この基板間にキラル液晶含有材料14を真空注入法で注入した。
キラル液晶含有材料14は、キラル液晶含有材料7 89.1%と下記モノマー混合物4 10.9%とを配合して調製した。キラル液晶含有材料14は、加熱において42.7℃でコレステリック相からブルー相(アモルファス)へ転移し、51.8℃でブルー相(アモルファス)からアイソトロピック相へ転移した。
メタルハライドランプを光源とし、紫外線カットフィルターL-37(ホーヤ カンデオ オプトロニクス社製)を介して、紫外光(中心波長365nmでの照度は5mW/cm2)を、キラル液晶組成物14を挟持した液晶表示装置のカラーフィルタの形成していない第二の基板側から、ブルー相(アモルファス)を示す44℃で300秒間照射した。重合性化合物を重合させることにより、実施例49~52の液晶・高分子複合材料7からなる液晶表示装置を作製した。
室温において偏光顕微鏡で観察したところ、セルを回転させても完全な暗視野を維持し、変化が無くアイソトロピック相と同等の黒さが得られており、配向欠陥による光抜けは観察されず、ブルー相(アモルファス)であることを確認した。
得られた液晶表示装置のVHRを、ブルー相(アモルファス)を示す温度で測定した。また、得られた液晶表示装置の焼き付き評価を行った。その結果を表18に示す。
表1に示す比較カラーフィルタ1を用いた以外は、実施例29~32と同様にして比較例12の液晶表示装置を作製した。また表1に示す比較カラーフィルタ1を用いた以外は、実施例33~36と同様にして比較例13の液晶表示装置を作製した。また表1に示す比較カラーフィルタ1を用いた以外は、実施例36~40と同様にして比較例14の液晶表示装置を作製した。また表1に示す比較カラーフィルタ1を用いた以外は、実施例41~44と同様にして比較例15の液晶表示装置を作製した。また表1に示す比較カラーフィルタ1を用いた以外は、実施例45~48と同様にして比較例16の液晶表示装置を作製した。また表1に示す比較カラーフィルタ1を用いた以外は、実施例49~52と同様にして比較例17の液晶表示装置を作製した。さらに表1に示す比較カラーフィルタ1を用いた以外は、実施例53~56と同様にして比較例18の液晶表示装置を作製した。
室温において偏光顕微鏡で観察したところ、セルを回転させても完全な暗視野を維持し、変化が無くアイソトロピック相と同等の黒さが得られており、配向欠陥による光抜けは観察されず、ブルー相(キュービック)あるいはブルー相(アモルファス)であることを確認した。
得られた液晶表示装置のVHRを、ブルー相(キュービック)あるいはブルー相(アモルファス)を示す温度で測定した。また、得られた液晶表示装置の焼き付き評価を行った。その結果を表19に示す。
なお、LC-1~8、CH-1~5、モノマー混合物1~4の式中で、CH3、C2H5、C3H7、C4H9、C5H11及びC6H13は、いずれも直鎖状のアルキル基を表す。
Claims (17)
- 第一の基板と、第二の基板と、前記第一の基板と第二の基板間に挟持された液晶層と、ブラックマトリックス及び少なくともRGB三色画素部から構成されるカラーフィルタと、画素電極と共通電極とを備え、
前記液晶層が少なくとも2種類のアキラルな液晶性化合物を含むネマチック液晶組成物と、少なくとも1種類のキラル化合物とを含むキラル液晶含有材料から構成され、
前記RGB三色画素部が、色材として、R画素部中にジケトピロロピロール顔料及び/又はアニオン性赤色有機染料を、G画素部中にハロゲン化銅フタロシニアン顔料、フタロシアニン系緑色染料、フタロシアニン系青色染料とアゾ系黄色有機染料との混合物からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも一種を、B画素部中にε型銅フタロシニアン顔料及び/又はカチオン性青色有機染料を含有することを特徴とする液晶表示装置。 - 前記RGB三色画素部が、色材として、R画素部中にC.I.Solvent Red 124を、G画素部中にC.I.Solvent Blue 67とC.I.Solvent Yellow 162との混合物を、B画素部中にC.I.Solvent Blue 7を含有することを特徴とする請求項1記載の液晶表示装置。
- 前記RGB三色画素部が、色材として、R画素部中にC.I.Pigment Red 254を、G画素部中にC.I.Pigment Green 7及び/又は同36を、B画素部中にC.I.Pigment Blue 15:6を含有することを特徴とする請求項1記載の液晶表示装置。
- R画素部中に更に、C.I.Pigment Red 177、同242、同166、同167、同179、C.I.Pigment Orange 38、同71、C.I.Pigment Yellow 150、同215、同185、同138、同139、C.I.Solvent Red 89、C.I.Solvent Orange 56、C.I.Solvent Yellow 21、同82、同83:1、同33、同162からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の有機染顔料を含有する請求項1~3のいずれか一項に記載の液晶表示装置。
- G画素部中に更に、C.I.Pigment Yellow 150、同215、同185、同138、C.I.Solvent Yellow 21、同82、同83:1、同33からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の有機染顔料を含有する請求項1~4のいずれか一項に記載の液晶表示装置。
- B画素部中に更に、C.I.Pigment Blue 1、C.I.Pigment Violet 23、C.I.Basic Blue 7、C.I.Basic Violet 10、C.I.Acid Blue 1、同90、同83、C.I.Direct Blue 86からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の有機染顔料を含有する請求項1~5のいずれか一項に記載の液晶表示装置。
- カラーフィルタが、ブラックマトリックスとRGB三色画素部とY画素部とから構成され、色材として、Y画素部に、C.I.Pigment Yellow 150、同215、同185、同138、同139、C.I.Solvent Yellow 21、82、同83:1、同33、同162からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種の黄色有機染顔料を含有する請求項1~6のいずれか一項に記載の液晶表示装置。
- 前記ネマチック液晶組成物が、少なくとも-10℃~50℃の温度範囲でネマチック液晶相を示す請求項1~7のいずれか一項に記載の液晶表示装置。
- 前記ネマチック液晶組成物の誘電率異方性(Δε)が正である請求項1~8のいずれか一項に記載の液晶表示装置。
- 前記キラル液晶含有材料が少なくとも2種類のキラル化合物を含む請求項1~9のいずれか一項に記載の液晶表示装置。
- 前記キラル液晶含有材料がコレステリック相を示す請求項1~10のいずれか一項に記載の液晶表示装置。
- 前記キラル液晶含有材料がブルー相を示す請求項1~10のいずれか一項に記載の液晶表示装置。
- 前記ネマチック液晶組成物が一般式(I)
A11、A12及びA13はそれぞれ独立して、
(a) トランス-1,4-シクロへキシレン基(当該基中に存在する1個のメチレン基又は互いに隣接していない2個以上のメチレン基は、それぞれ独立して、酸素原子又は硫黄原子に置換されてもよく、当該基中に存在する1個又は2個以上の水素原子は、それぞれ独立して、シアノ基、フッ素原子又は塩素原子で置換されていてもよい。)、
(b) 1,4-フェニレン基(当該基中に存在する1個の-CH=又は互いに隣接していない2個以上の-CH=は、窒素原子に置換されてもよく、当該基中に存在する1個又は2個以上の水素原子は、それぞれ独立して、シアノ基、フッ素原子又は塩素原子で置換されていてもよい。) 、又は
(c) 1,4-シクロヘキセニレン基、1,4-ビシクロ(2.2.2)オクチレン基、ナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基、デカヒドロナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基、及び1,2,3,4-テトラヒドロナフタレン-2,6-ジイル基からなる群より選択される基(これらの基中に存在する1個の-CH=又は互いに隣接していない2個以上の-CH=は、窒素原子に置換されてもよく、これらの基中に存在する1個又は2個以上の水素原子は、それぞれ独立して、シアノ基、フッ素原子又は塩素原子で置換されていてもよい。)を表し、
a11は0、1、2又は3を表し、
L11及びL12はそれぞれ独立して、単結合、-CH2CH2-、-(CH2)4-、-OCH2-、-CH2O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-CF2CF2-、-OCF2-、-CF2O-、-CH=N-N=CH-、-CH=CH-、-CF=CF-、-C≡C-、-N=N-、-CH=N-、-SCH2-、-CH2S-、―CSO-、-OCS-、-CF2S-、又は-SCF2-を表す。)で表される化合物を含有する請求項1~12のいずれか一項に記載の液晶表示装置。 - 前記ネマチック液晶組成物が一般式(II)
R21は炭素原子数1~16のアルキル基、炭素原子数1~16のアルコキシ基、炭素原子数2~16のアルケニル基、又は炭素原子数2~16のアルケニルオキシ基を表し、前記R21中に存在する1個のメチレン基又は互いに隣接していない2個以上のメチレン基は、それぞれ独立して、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-COO-又は-OCO-に置換されてもよく、前記R21中に存在する1個又は2個以上の水素原子は、それぞれ独立して、フッ素原子又は塩素原子で置換されていてもよく、
L21及びL22はそれぞれ独立して、単結合、-CH2CH2-、-(CH2)4-、-OCH2-、-CH2O-、-COO-、-OCO-、-CF2CF2-、-OCF2-、-CF2O-、-CH=N-N=CH-、-CH=CH-、-CF=CF-、-C≡C-、-N=N-、-CH=N-、-SCH2-、-CH2S-、―CSO-、-OCS-、-CF2S-、又は-SCF2-を表し(L21が2個存在する場合は、それらは同一でもよく、異なっていてもよい。)、
X21は、水素原子、フッ素原子、塩素原子、シアノ基、トリフルオロメチル基、フルオロメトキシ基、ジフルオロメトキシ基、トリフルオロメトキシ基、又は2,2,2-トリフルオロエチル基を表す。)で表される化合物を含有する請求項1~13のいずれか一項に記載の液晶表示装置。 - 前記キラル液晶含有材料が、少なくとも1種類の重合性化合物が重合してなる高分子を含む液晶・高分子複合材料であることを特徴とする請求項1~14のいずれか一項に記載の液晶表示装置。
- 前記重合性化合物として、少なくとも1種類の非液晶性重合性化合物を含む請求項15に記載の液晶表示装置。
- 前記重合性化合物として、少なくとも1種類の単官能性重合性化合物と少なくとも1種類の多官能性重合性化合物とを含む請求項15又は16に記載の液晶表示装置。
Priority Applications (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US14/895,987 US10011773B2 (en) | 2013-06-06 | 2014-06-03 | Liquid crystal display device |
JP2015515054A JP5825543B2 (ja) | 2013-06-06 | 2014-06-03 | 液晶表示装置 |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2013-119770 | 2013-06-06 | ||
JP2013119770 | 2013-06-06 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2014196527A1 true WO2014196527A1 (ja) | 2014-12-11 |
Family
ID=52008166
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2014/064731 WO2014196527A1 (ja) | 2013-06-06 | 2014-06-03 | 液晶表示装置 |
Country Status (3)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US10011773B2 (ja) |
JP (2) | JP5825543B2 (ja) |
WO (1) | WO2014196527A1 (ja) |
Cited By (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN107849450A (zh) * | 2015-07-08 | 2018-03-27 | 依视路国际公司 | 用于获得包含具有稳定蓝相的液晶混合物的材料的方法以及包含该材料的光学物品 |
US10633589B2 (en) | 2016-10-25 | 2020-04-28 | Jnc Corporation | Liquid crystal medium, optical device and liquid crystal compound |
Families Citing this family (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN104698524B (zh) * | 2015-02-13 | 2018-04-03 | 上海天马微电子有限公司 | 一种偏振片及其制备方法和图像显示面板、图像显示装置 |
KR101809369B1 (ko) * | 2016-06-10 | 2017-12-15 | 한양대학교 산학협력단 | 전도성 구조체 및 그 제조 방법, 그를 포함하는 터치 센서 및 터치 센서의 제조 방법 및 터치 센싱 방법 |
KR102573690B1 (ko) * | 2016-09-30 | 2023-09-04 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | 박막트랜지스터 어레이 기판 및 이를 포함하는 표시장치 |
JP6866625B2 (ja) * | 2016-12-08 | 2021-04-28 | Jnc株式会社 | 液晶組成物および液晶表示素子 |
JP7183541B2 (ja) * | 2018-01-18 | 2022-12-06 | Dic株式会社 | 液晶組成物及び液晶表示素子 |
KR102610160B1 (ko) * | 2018-05-14 | 2023-12-05 | 삼성디스플레이 주식회사 | 표시 장치 및 표시 장치의 제조 방법 |
Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2009144126A (ja) * | 2007-12-18 | 2009-07-02 | Fujifilm Corp | 処理顔料、処理顔料の製造方法、顔料分散組成物、着色感光性組成物、カラーフィルタ、及びカラーフィルタの製造方法 |
JP2011069922A (ja) * | 2009-09-24 | 2011-04-07 | Fujifilm Corp | 液晶表示装置 |
JP2011221078A (ja) * | 2010-04-05 | 2011-11-04 | Toppan Printing Co Ltd | アレイ基板及びそれを備えた液晶表示装置 |
Family Cites Families (13)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2000019321A (ja) | 1998-06-29 | 2000-01-21 | Toray Ind Inc | カラーフィルター用顔料、カラーペースト及びカラーフィルター |
JP2000192040A (ja) | 1998-12-25 | 2000-07-11 | Toshiba Corp | 液晶表示装置 |
JP3779937B2 (ja) * | 2002-05-08 | 2006-05-31 | 独立行政法人科学技術振興機構 | 光学変調素子用液晶材料 |
JP5875032B2 (ja) * | 2007-05-08 | 2016-03-02 | 国立大学法人九州大学 | 高分子/液晶複合材料および液晶素子 |
JP2009109542A (ja) | 2007-10-26 | 2009-05-21 | Toppan Printing Co Ltd | カラーフィルタおよびこれを備えた横電界方式の液晶表示装置 |
JP5260162B2 (ja) * | 2008-06-30 | 2013-08-14 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | カラーフィルタ、及び液晶表示装置 |
US8860912B2 (en) * | 2012-02-01 | 2014-10-14 | Dic Corporation | Liquid crystal display device |
TWI447210B (zh) * | 2012-07-25 | 2014-08-01 | Dainippon Ink & Chemicals | Liquid crystal display device |
US9193906B2 (en) * | 2012-10-03 | 2015-11-24 | Dic Corporation | Liquid crystal display device |
TWI476273B (zh) * | 2012-12-04 | 2015-03-11 | Dainippon Ink & Chemicals | Liquid crystal display device |
JP5321932B1 (ja) * | 2013-02-21 | 2013-10-23 | Dic株式会社 | 液晶表示装置 |
EP2840437B1 (en) * | 2013-06-18 | 2017-07-26 | DIC Corporation | Liquid crystal display device |
US9809752B2 (en) * | 2013-06-18 | 2017-11-07 | Dic Corporation | Liquid crystal display device |
-
2014
- 2014-06-03 WO PCT/JP2014/064731 patent/WO2014196527A1/ja active Application Filing
- 2014-06-03 US US14/895,987 patent/US10011773B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2014-06-03 JP JP2015515054A patent/JP5825543B2/ja not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2015
- 2015-07-21 JP JP2015144018A patent/JP6083454B2/ja not_active Expired - Fee Related
Patent Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2009144126A (ja) * | 2007-12-18 | 2009-07-02 | Fujifilm Corp | 処理顔料、処理顔料の製造方法、顔料分散組成物、着色感光性組成物、カラーフィルタ、及びカラーフィルタの製造方法 |
JP2011069922A (ja) * | 2009-09-24 | 2011-04-07 | Fujifilm Corp | 液晶表示装置 |
JP2011221078A (ja) * | 2010-04-05 | 2011-11-04 | Toppan Printing Co Ltd | アレイ基板及びそれを備えた液晶表示装置 |
Cited By (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN107849450A (zh) * | 2015-07-08 | 2018-03-27 | 依视路国际公司 | 用于获得包含具有稳定蓝相的液晶混合物的材料的方法以及包含该材料的光学物品 |
KR20180048566A (ko) * | 2015-07-08 | 2018-05-10 | 에씰로 앙터나시오날 | 안정화된 청색 위상을 갖는 액정 혼합물을 포함하는 물질의 수득 방법 및 상기 물질을 포함하는 광학 물품 |
JP2018525470A (ja) * | 2015-07-08 | 2018-09-06 | エシロール アンテルナショナルEssilor International | 安定化されたブルー相を有する液晶混合物を含む材料を得るための方法及びこの材料を含む光学物品 |
US10920145B2 (en) | 2015-07-08 | 2021-02-16 | Essilor International | Method for obtaining a material comprising a liquid crystal mix with a stabilized blue phase and optical article comprising this material |
JP7053451B2 (ja) | 2015-07-08 | 2022-04-12 | エシロール アンテルナショナル | 安定化されたブルー相を有する液晶混合物を含む材料を得るための方法及びこの材料を含む光学物品 |
KR102624570B1 (ko) * | 2015-07-08 | 2024-01-12 | 에씰로 앙터나시오날 | 안정화된 청색 위상을 갖는 액정 혼합물을 포함하는 물질의 수득 방법 및 상기 물질을 포함하는 광학 물품 |
US10633589B2 (en) | 2016-10-25 | 2020-04-28 | Jnc Corporation | Liquid crystal medium, optical device and liquid crystal compound |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JP5825543B2 (ja) | 2015-12-02 |
US10011773B2 (en) | 2018-07-03 |
JPWO2014196527A1 (ja) | 2017-02-23 |
US20160215217A1 (en) | 2016-07-28 |
JP6083454B2 (ja) | 2017-02-22 |
JP2016021066A (ja) | 2016-02-04 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP6143088B2 (ja) | 液晶表示装置 | |
JP5765508B2 (ja) | 液晶表示装置 | |
JP6083454B2 (ja) | 液晶表示装置 | |
TWI589677B (zh) | 鐵電性液晶組成物及鐵電性液晶顯示元件 | |
EP2657754B1 (en) | Liquid crystal display device | |
EP2696236B1 (en) | Liquid crystal display device | |
JP5525213B2 (ja) | 偏光膜、積層体、及び液晶表示装置 | |
EP2796922B1 (en) | Liquid crystal display device | |
EP3112930B1 (en) | Liquid crystal display device | |
EP2916167B1 (en) | Liquid crystal display device | |
JP6198092B2 (ja) | 液晶組成物及びこれを用いた液晶表示素子 | |
JP6143087B2 (ja) | 液晶表示装置 | |
JP5935523B2 (ja) | 液晶表示装置 | |
JP5943228B2 (ja) | 液晶表示素子 | |
JP6932338B2 (ja) | 液晶組成物及び光学素子 | |
JP5935522B2 (ja) | 液晶表示装置 | |
JP5935521B2 (ja) | 液晶表示装置 | |
CN111948846B (zh) | 高分子分散型液晶元件和高分子分散型液晶元件用液晶组合物 | |
JPWO2019124155A1 (ja) | 液晶表示素子 | |
WO2016059896A1 (ja) | 液晶表示装置及び液晶組成物 |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 14807374 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2015515054 Country of ref document: JP Kind code of ref document: A |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 14895987 Country of ref document: US |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 14807374 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |